| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
Manual 1 | Users Manual | 434.55 KiB | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | |||
| 1 |
|
Manual 2 | Users Manual | 421.42 KiB | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | |||
| 1 |
|
Manual 3 | Users Manual | 422.84 KiB | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | |||
| 1 |
|
Manual 4 | Users Manual | 422.09 KiB | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | |||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 | External Photos | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 | Internal Photos | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | May 08 2005 / November 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 | RF Exposure Info | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Report | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Report | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Report | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 |
| 1 | Manual 1 | Users Manual | 434.55 KiB | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 |
Nokia 2125, Nokia 2125i User Guide LEGAL INFORMATION Issue 1 931169X26 1 Part No. xxxxxxx, Issue No. 1 Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nokia 2125, Nokia 2125i, Xpress-on, Pop-Port, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Printed in Canada 2005 US Patent No. 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright 1999-2005. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 2125 and Nokia 2125i products. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED AS IS. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, technology, or software subject to export laws and regulations from the U.S. and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. 2 Table of Contents T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s For your safety 41.Phone at a glance 92.Set up your phone 133.Text entry 214. Contacts list 245.Messages 316.Call log 427.Profiles 468.Settings 479.Gallery 6510.Games 6611.Voice 6712.Minibrowser 7013.Organizer 7314.Applications 8115.PC Connectivity 8216.Enhancements 8417.Battery information 86Care and maintenance 89Additional safety information 91 3 F o r y o u r s a f e t y For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the phone at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. 4 F o r y o u r s a f e t y WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your phone. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. n About your device The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the CDMA 800 and CDMA 1900 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. n Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilize network services. Your service provider may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured. This configuration may include 5 F o r y o u r s a f e t y changes in menu names, menu order and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as the Minibrowser, require network support for these technologies. n Shared memory The following features in this device may share memory: contacts, text messages, images, and tones in Gallery, calendar notes, games, and applications. Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features sharing memory. Your phone may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. Some of the features, such as images, tones in Gallery, text messages, and applications may have a certain amount of memory specially allotted to them in addition to the memory shared with other features. 6 Welcome W e l c o m e Congratulations on your purchase of the Nokia 2125 or Nokia 2125i mobile phones. Your phone provides many functions that are practical for daily use, such as a hands-free loudspeaker, alarm clock, calculator, calendar. Your phone can also connect to a PC, laptop, or other device using a data cable. To personalize your phone, you can set your favorite ring tones or select an Xpress-onTM color cover. n Get help Find your phone label If you need help, Nokia Customer Care is available for assistance. Before calling, we recommend that you write down the following information and have it available:
Electronic serial number (ESN)
Your zip code The ESN is found on the type label, which is located beneath the battery on the back of the phone. See "Remove the back cover," p. 14 and "Remove the battery," p. 14. Contact Nokia Please have your product with you when contacting either of the numbers below:
Nokia Customer Care Center, USA Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Boulevard, Suite #160 Tampa, Florida 33614 Tel: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Fax: 1-813-249-9619 TTY/TDD users: 1-800-24-NOKIA (1-800-246-6542) Customer Care Center, Canada Nokia Products Ltd. 7 W e l c o m e 601 Westney Road South Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 1-888-22-NOKIA (1-888-226-6542) Fax: 1-905-427-1070 Updates From time to time, Nokia updates this guide to reflect changes. The latest version and an interactive tutorial for this product may be available at the web site www.nokiausa.com. Accessibility solutions Nokia is committed to making mobile phones easy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities. For more information visit the web site at www.nokiaaccessibility.com. 8 1. Phone at a glance P h o n e a t a g l a n c e
Power key and flashlight
(1)
Earpiece (2)
Right selection key (3)
End key (4)
Keypad (5)
Connection port (6)
Microphone (7)
Charger port (8)
Scroll up and down key
(9)
Call key (10)
Left selection key (11)
Display screen (12) n The start screen Depending on your wireless service provider and the model number of your device, some or all of the following selection keys may appear on the start screen. 9 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e The start screen is home base and indicates that your phone is in the standby mode. Signal strength (1)A higher bar indicates a stronger network signal. Battery level (2)A higher bar indicates more charge in the battery. Menu (3)Press the left selection key to select this option. Contacts (4)Press the right selection key to select this option. n Quick keys In the standby mode, press the scroll down key to access the contacts list, and press the scroll up key to activate the flashlight. n Indicators and icons Depending on your wireless service provider and the model number of your phone, some or all of the following indicators and icons may appear in the standby mode:
You have new text or picture messages. See "Text messages," p. 32. You have new voice messages. See "Voice messages," p. 37. Device keypad is locked. See "Keyguard," p. 20. Device is set to the silent profile. See "Profiles," p. 43. Alarm clock is set to on. See "Alarm clock," p. 67. Countdown timer is running. See "Countdown timer," p. 71. Stopwatch timer running in the background. See "Stopwatch," p. 72. Integrated hands-free is active. See "Use the loudspeaker," p. 19. Timed profile is selected. See "Profiles," p. 43. An enhancement is connected to the device. See "Enhancements," p. 75. or Voice privacy encryption is active in the network. See "Security settings," 54. 10 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e or Location info sharing is set to Emergency or On. See "Location information sharing," p. 44. Vibrating alert is active. See "Customize a profile," p. 43. You are roaming outside your home network. See "Roaming options," p. 57. You are in a 1XRTT network. See "Network services," p. 5. You are in a digital network. See "Network services," p. 5. You are in an analog network. See "Network services," p. 5. or Off hook, call or data call in progress. n Phone menus Phone features are grouped according to function and are accessed through the main menus. Each main menu contains submenus and lists from which you can select or view items and customize your phone features. To access these menus and submenus use the scroll method or use a shortcut. Some features may not be available, depending on your network. For more information, contact your wireless provider. The scroll method 1. In the standby mode, select Menu, and scroll up or down through the main menus. As you scroll through the menus, the menu number appears in the upper right corner of the display. Below the number is a scroll bar with a tab that moves up or down on the right side of the display screen as you scroll through the menus. This display provides a visual representation of your current position in the menu structure. 2. When you arrive at a menu, press the left selection key to enter submenus or, when the browser appears on the display, select Connect to enter that menu.
Select Back (the right selection key) to return to the previous menu.
Select the end key from any submenu or select Exit from the main menu level to return to the standby mode. 11 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e Shortcuts To go directly to almost any menu or submenu, as well as activate most features use a shortcut. In the standby mode, select Menu; then within 3 seconds, press the key or keys associated with the menu function you would like to view or activate. For example, to select the meeting profile, select Menu 3-3-1 from standby mode
(Menu > 3 Profiles > 3 Meeting > 1 Activate). After a brief pause, the Meeting profile is activated. In-phone help Many features have brief descriptions (help text) that can be viewed on the display. In order to view the descriptions, you must first activate help text. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off. To view these descriptions, scroll to a feature, and wait for about 15 seconds. Select More, when necessary, to view all of the description, or select Back to exit. 12 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 2. Set up your phone n Antenna Your phone has an internal antenna that is located toward the top of the phone. In the Nokia 2125 and Nokia 2125i phones, the GPS antenna is internal and is activated when you place emergency calls or when Location on is selected from the Location info sharing menu. See "Location information sharing," p. 44. Hold the phone as you would any other telephone with the antenna area pointed up and over your shoulder. Note: As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the device is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna while operating the device optimizes the antenna performance and the battery life. n Change the battery Always switch the device off, and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. 13 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the ACP-7 and ACP-12 chargers. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Note: Always switch off the power and disconnect the charger and any other device before removing the cover . Avoid touching electronic components while changing the cover. Always store and use the device with the cover attached. Remove the back cover 1. With the back of the phone facing you, push down on the back cover release button. 2. Slide the back cover toward the bottom of the phone and remove. Remove the battery After you have removed the back cover, insert your finger into the finger grip, and lift the battery from its compartment. 14 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Replace the battery 1. Position the battery so the positive and negative indicators on the battery match up with the positive and negative indicators on the phone. The battery label should face away from the phone. 2. Insert the battery, gold-colored contact end first, into the battery slot. 3. Push down on the other end of the battery to snap it into place. Replace the back cover Slide the back cover toward the top of the phone until the back cover is securely in place. Charge the battery 1. Plug the charger into a standard ac outlet. 2. Insert the charger output plug into the round jack at the bottom end of the phone. After a few seconds, the battery indicator on the display starts to scroll from bottom to top. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. 15 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e n Turn your phone on or off 1. To turn your phone on or off, press and hold the power key on top of the phone for at least 3 seconds. 2. Enter the lock code. if necessary, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. n Connect the headset A compatible headset, such as HS-5, may be purchased with your phone or separately as an enhancement. See "Enhancements," p. 75. Warning: When using the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Important: The headset may affect your ability to hear sounds around you. Do not use this headset in situations that may endanger your safety. 1. Plug the headset connector into the Pop-Port connector at the bottom end of your phone. appears in the standby mode. 2. Position the headset on your ear. With the headset connected, make, answer, and end calls as usual.
Use the keypad to enter numbers.
Press the call key to place a call.
Press the end key to end a call. n Change the Xpress-on covers Note: Always switch off the power, and disconnect the charger and any other device, before removing the cover. Do not touch electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the device with the covers attached. 16 To change the Xpress-on covers, first remove the back cover and battery. S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Remove the front cover Gently pull the bottom of the front cover away from the rest of the phone. Install the keymat and front cover 1. Remove the keymat from the old front cover. 2. Place the keymat into the new front cover. 17 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 3. Press the front cover and keymat against the phone, and snap the front cover into place. 4. Replace the battery and back cover. n Make a call Use the keypad 1. Enter the phone number (including the area code), and press the call key. To delete a character to the left of the cursor, select Clear. 2. Press the end key to end the call, or select End call to cancel the call attempt. Use the contacts list 1. 2. Press the call key to make the call, or select Details to view details of the In the standby mode, scroll down to the entry you wish to view. entry. Use the last dialed number 1. In the standby mode, press the call key to display the last 20 numbers dialed. 2. Scroll to the number (or name) you wish to redial, and press the call key. Conference calls Conference calling is a network service that allows you to take part in a conference call with two other participants. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. With the first participant on the line, select Options > New call. 3. Enter the phone number of the second participant, or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list. 4. Select Flash and the first participant is put on hold. 18 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 5. When the second participant answers, press the call key to connect the calls. 6. To end the conference call, press the end key. n Answer calls Answer, silence, or decline an incoming call Silence and Decline are carrier dependent features. 1. Press the call or Answer key to answer the call. 2. To mute the ringing tone, select Silence. If you do not answer the call, the call is forwarded to voicemail. 3. To dismiss and forward the call to voicemail (a carrier dependent feature), select Decline after you have muted the ringing tone, or press the end key at any time. Answer a call with the keypad locked To answer a call with the keypad locked, press the call key. During the call, all features function normally. When you end, silence or decline the call, the keypad automatically relocks. See "Keyguard," p. 20. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. Adjust the earpiece volume While in a call, scroll up or down to adjust the volume of the earpiece. When you adjust the volume, a bar chart appears in the display to indicate the volume level. Use the loudspeaker You can use your phone as a loudspeaker during a call.
To activate the loudspeaker, select Loudspeaker.
To deactivate the loudspeaker during a call, select Handset. The loudspeaker is deactivated automatically when a call (or a call attempt) ends, or when certain enhancements are connected. 19 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Options during a call Many of the options that used during a call are network services. Check with your wireless service provider for more information. 1. Select Options to display the following:
Mute or UnmuteSilence your end of the call. Loudspeaker or HandsetActivate or deactivate the loudspeaker while in a call. New callInitiate a conference call. See "Conference calls," p. 18. SaveSave the number you entered during a call. Add to contactSave the number you entered during a call to a contact already in the contacts list. End all callsDisconnect from all active calls. Touch tonesEnter the numbers, and select Tones to send the numbers as tones. ContactsView the contacts list. MenuView the phone menu. 2. Scroll to and select an option to activate the option or enter its submenu. n Keyguard Use keyguard, to lock the keypad and prevent keys from being pressed accidentally. Remember to lock your phone keypad to prevent accidental calls. If the keypad is locked, it unlocks when you receive a call. After the call, the lock automatically reactivates. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your phone. Enter the emergency number and press the call key. See "Automatic keyguard," p. 47. Lock the keypad Select Menu; then press * within 2 seconds. 20 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Unlock the keypad Select Unlock; then press * within 2 seconds. 21 T e x t e n t r y 3. Text entry You can use two methods for entering text and numbers: standard mode and predictive text mode.
Select Clear to backspace the cursor and delete a character.
Select and hold Clear to backspace continuously and delete characters. n Standard mode Standard mode is the only way to enter text into the contacts list and to rename caller groups. Text (Abc) Press a key once to insert the first letter on the key and twice for the second letter, etc. If you pause briefly, the last letter in the display is accepted and your device awaits the next entry.
Press 0 to enter a space and accept a completed word.
Press 1 to insert a period into your message.
Press and hold * to display a complete list of special characters.
Press and hold # to switch between letters and numbers. Numbers (123) To switch from Abc mode to 123 mode, press and hold # at any message entry screen. Punctuation and special characters While at any text entry screen, press * to display special characters (press and hold * if predictive text is on). Press * again to cycle through all available characters. To navigate through the list of special characters, use the scroll keys. Once a character is highlighted, select Insert to insert the character into your message. 22 T e x t e n t r y n Predictive text mode To write messages quickly, use predictive text mode with your keypad and the built-in dictionary. Predictive text mode is much faster than the standard mode method because you do not need to scroll through the letters on each key to spell a word. The dictionary determines which word to enter based on the keys selected. Activate or deactivate At any text entry screen, select Options > Predictive text > English, Franais, or Espaol to activate predictive text; or select Prediction off to deactivate predictive text. Text entry The illustration below simulates your display each time a key is pressed. For example, to write Nokia with predictive text on and the English dictionary selected, press each of the following keys:
4 6 6 5 2
Press 0 to enter a space, and begin writing the next word.
If a displayed word is not correct, press * to see other matches. To return to the previous word in the list of matches, select Previous.
If ? appears after a word, select Spell to enter the word with the standard mode, and add the word to the dictionary.
Press 1 to insert a period into your message.
Press and hold * to display special characters. Press * again to cycle through all available characters. n Change case and mode Press # to switch between uppercase, lowercase, and sentence case text and between standard and predictive text mode. Case and mode are indicated by the icons that appear in the upper left of the display screen, as follows:
Uppercase text: standard mode is on. 23 T e x t e n t r y Lowercase text: standard mode is on. Sentence case text: standard mode is on. This option is available only at the beginning of a sentence. Uppercase text: predictive text is on. Lowercase text: predictive text is on. Sentence case text: predictive text is on. This option is available only at the beginning of a sentence. 24 4. Contacts list C o n t a c t s l i s t The contacts list can hold up to 500 contacts with multiple numbers and text notes for each contact. The amount of numbers and text entries that you can save may vary, depending on length and the total number of entries in the contacts list. n Search In the standby mode, select Contacts > Search; highlight the contact you wish to view, and select Details. n Add new contacts In the standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save. Save a name and number 1. 2. Select Options > Save. 3. Enter the contact name, and select OK. Save (only) a number In the standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save; select and hold Options. Save multiple numbers and text items The first number you save for any entry is automatically set as the default. The default setting can be changed later. To save different types of phone numbers and short text items per name to the phone memory, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display a list of entries. Scroll to the entry to which you wish to add a phone number or text item. 2. Select Details > Options > Add number to add a General, Mobile, Home, Work, or Fax number; or Add detail to add an E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note . 3. Enter the number or text for the type you have selected, and select OK. 25 C o n t a c t s l i s t 4. To change the type (E-mail, Web address, Street addr.), select Change type in the options list. To change which phone number is the default number for the contact entry:
1. In the standby mode, scroll down to the entry you wish to change, and select Details. 2. Scroll to the number you wish to set as default, select Options > As primary no. Set up voice tags For more information on setting up voice tags and other voice features, see
"Voice tags," p. 63. Caller groups You can add contact list entries to any of five caller groups, and assign a unique ringing tone or graphic to that group. This enables you to identify callers from the group by their unique ringing tone or graphic. Set up a caller group 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display a list of entries in your contacts list. 2. Scroll to a name you want to add to a caller group, and select Details. 3. Select Options > Caller groups. 4. Scroll to and select the caller group to which you would like to add the name. Options 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Caller groups > Family, VIP, Friends, Business, and Other. 2. Select from following caller group options:
Rename groupRename the group to your preference. Group ringing toneSet the ringing tone for the group. Group logoTurn the graphic for the caller group on or off or view the graphic. Group membersAdd or remove members from the caller group. 26 C o n t a c t s l i s t Set up 1-touch dialing You can associate any entry in the contacts list with a key from 29; then dial those entries by pressing and holding the assigned key. See "1-touch dialing," p. 45 to activate or deactivate 1-touch dialing. Assign a key to 1-touch dialing 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. If 1-touch dialing is off, the phone displays a prompt asking if you would like to turn 1-touch dialing on. Select Yes to activate 1-touch dialing 2. Scroll to an (empty) 1-touch dialing slot, and select Assign. 3. Enter the number (including the area code) and a name for the contact, or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list. 4. Select OK. Change 1-touch dialing numbers 1. 2. Scroll to the 1-touch dialing entry you wish to change, and select Options >
In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. Change. 3. Enter the new number; or search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. 4. Enter a name for the entry, and select OK. In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. Delete 1-touch dialing numbers 1. 2. Scroll to the 1-touch dialing location you wish to delete, and select Options. 3. Select Delete > OK. n Edit contacts list entries 1. 2. Scroll to the entry you would like to edit; select Details and one of the In the standby mode, scroll down to display the contents of your contacts list. following options:
Add voice tag or Voice tagAdd a new voice tag or Playback, Change, or Delete an existing voice tag. Edit numberEdit an existing contact number. 27 C o n t a c t s l i s t Delete numberDelete a phone number from the contact. Use numberDisplay the phone number in the standby mode, ready to be called. ViewView the details of the contact. Change typeChange the number type to General, Mobile, Home, Work, or Fax or the detail type to E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note As primary no.Change the default number of the contact. Add numberAdd a number to the contact. Add detailAdd an address or note to the contact. Caller groupsAdd the contact to an existing caller group. Custom toneAdd a custom ringing tone to the contact. Send bus. cardSend the contact as a business card to another phone. Send messageCreate and send a message to the contact. 1-touch dialingAdd the contact to your speed dial list. Edit nameEdit the name of the contact. View nameView the name of the contact. DeleteDelete the entire contact entry from your contacts list. Edit phone number Highlight the phone number you would like to edit, and select Options. E-mail address entry Highlight the e-mail address entry you would like to send or update, and select Options and one of the following:
Send e-mailSend an e-mail. Edit detailEdit e-mail details. Delete detailDelete e-mail. ViewView the details of the e-mail contact. Change typeChange the e-mail type to E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note. Add detailAdd an E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note to the entry. 28 C o n t a c t s l i s t Add numberAdd a number to the entry. Caller groupsAdd the e-mail to an existing caller group. Custom toneAdd a custom ring tone to the contact. Send bus. cardSend the contact a business card. Edit nameEdit the name of the contact. View nameView the name of the contact. DeleteDelete the entire e-mail entry from your contacts list. Edit Web address 1. Highlight the web address entry you would like to edit, and select Options. 2. Select Web address, Street addr., or Note > OK. n Delete contacts list entries In the standby mode, select Contacts > Delete.
To delete individual entries, select One by one, and scroll to the entry you wish to delete. Select Delete > OK to confirm.
To delete the entire contents of your contacts list, select Delete all > OK. Select OK to confirm or Back to return to Contacts. If OK, enter the security code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. n View the contacts list 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts and one of the following options:
SearchFind a name or select from a list. Add newAdd a contact to your contacts list. Edit nameEdit an existing name. DeleteDelete a name and its associated numbers. Add numberAdd a number to an existing name. SettingsChange the contacts list view, check the memory status of your phone. 1-touch dialingView or modify the list of 1-touch dialing numbers. Voice tagsAttach, listen to, or modify a contact voice tag. 29 C o n t a c t s l i s t Own numberView your own phone number. Caller groupsView and edit the properties for any of the caller groups:
Family, VIP, Friends, Business, or Other. 2. Scroll to and select an item to activate the feature or enter its submenu. Fast search for a name 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display your contacts list. 2. Press the key that corresponds to the first letter of the name for which you are performing a search. 3. Scroll up and down to highlight a contact, and select Details to view the details. Configure settings You can choose how the contacts appear in your contacts list and view the amount of memory used or available in your phone. For more information on used and available memory, see "Shared memory," p. 6. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Settings, and one of the following options:
Scrolling viewChoose how names and numbers stored in the contacts list are viewed. Select Name list or Name and no. Memory statusView the amount of memory used in phone book. n Send and receive contacts To send and receive an entry in your contacts list, use text messaging, if supported by your wireless provider. Send a business card To send a business card as a text message to a compatible phone or other handheld device, do the following:
1. Highlight the entry from the contacts list that you wish to send, and select Details > Options > Send bus. card > Via text msg., and do one of the following:
30 C o n t a c t s l i s t
Select Primary no. or All details, if the entry has more than one number or detail.
Enter the number for your recipient.
Select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts list. 2. Select OK , to send the business card. 31 M e s s a g e s 5. Messages If you have subscribed to a messaging service through your wireless provider, you can send and receive text messages to compatible phones that also subscribe to a compatible message service. You may also be able to send and receive picture messages and e-mail messages. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the 160 character limit for a single message. Longer messages will be sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options like Chinese, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. The number of characters remaining in a message are indicated by counter in upper right corner of screen. If there are special characters in your message, the indicator may not show the message length correctly. Note: When sending messages, your device may display Message sent. This is an indication that the message has been sent by your device to the message center number programed into your device. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. n Text messages Write and send 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message, and one of the following:
Text (select to send an alphanumeric text message) > Add number, Add e-mail, Edit message, List recipients, or Send.
Numeric page (select to send a numeric message) > Add number, Callback no., List recipients, or Send. 32 M e s s a g e s 2. Select Add number or Add e-mail to enter the recipients phone number or e-mail address; or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts list. Select OK. 3. Repeat step 2 to add more recipients, and select OK. 4. Select Options > Edit message. 5. Compose a message using the keypad, and select Options > Send. Messaging options When you create or reply to a text message, depending on the mode of text input you use and the features supported by your wireless service provider, some or all of the following options are available:
PreviewPreview messages.Use only if a graphic is attached to the message. SendSend the message to recipient. List recipientsSend the message to more than one recipient; or delete or edit the recipient list. SettingsSet or change how the message is sent (Urgent, Delivery note, or Callback no.). Save messageSave the message to a folder. Select Sent items, Templates, and Archive. Clear textErase the text clipboard. Exit editorSave the message to your Sent items folder automatically, and exit the message editor. Insert contactInsert a name from your contacts list into your message. Insert numberInsert a phone number or find a phone number in the contacts list, to insert into your message. Use templateInsert a predefined template into your message. Insert picture or Delete pictureInsert or delete a picture from the message. Pictures are inserted from the Templates folder. Insert word or Edit wordEnter or edit the text of a new word that might not appear in the predictive text dictionary. This displays only when the Predictive text is on. Insert symbolInsert a special character into your message. This displays only when the Predictive text is on. 33 M e s s a g e s Predictive textChoose a predictive text language, and turn the dictionary on or off. MatchesView matches found in the dictionary for the word you want to use. Templates Templates are short, prewritten messages that can be recalled and inserted into new text messages. 1. Open the blank message creation screen. See "Write and send," p. 32. 2. Select Options > Use template. 3. Scroll to and select one of the available templates. 4. Enter the text into your new message, and select Options > Send. Read messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. When you receive a text message, a notification message and are displayed in the upper left corner in the standby mode. When you have unopened messages in your Inbox, 1. Select Show to read the message or Exit to remove the notification icon. is displayed. Scroll to view the whole message, if necessary. 2. Select Options > Reply. 3. Select Empty screen, and compose your reply. 4. To send your reply, select Options > Send. Options When you read a text message, some or all of the following options are available depending on the text input mode and the features supported by your wireless service provider:
DeleteDiscard the message. ReplyReply to the message. Create the message, and select Options >Send. Use numberChoose Save, Add to contact, Send message, or Call. SaveSave the message to a folder. Use web linkActivate web link (appears when the message contains a URL). 34 M e s s a g e s Save addressSave e-mail address (appears when the message contains an e-mail address). ForwardForward the message to another phone number. RenameEdit the title of the message. Save pictureSave picture to your Templates folder. Appears when a graphic message is highlighted. n Message folders Save messages To save drafts or received messages to a folder, do the following:
Open the message or create a new message, and select Options > Save or Save message > Sent items, Archive, Templates, or a folder you created View saved messages 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages. 2. Select the folder containing the message you wish to view:
InboxStores read and unread messages. Sent itemsStores messages send from your phone automatically. ArchiveStores messages you have saved. TemplatesStores pictures and prewritten templates. My foldersProvides a place to organize your messages in custom folders. Select Options > Add folder or Open folder, Rename folder or Delete folder change a folder. 3. Once the folder opens, scroll to and select the message to view. n Delete messages Delete a single message 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages. 2. Scroll to and select the folder containing the message you wish to delete. 3. Select Options > Delete > OK. Select Back to exit. 35 M e s s a g e s If your message memory is full, Message overwriting is set to off, and you have more messages waiting at the network when No space for new messages is displayed in the standby mode. Delete messages in a folder 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Delete messages. 2. Scroll to the folder containing the messages you wish to delete, and Select one of the following options:
AllDeletes all messages in all folders All readDeletes any messages which have been read in all folders All unreadDeletes any messages which have not been read in all folders InboxDeletes all messages from the Inbox folder Sent itemsDeletes all messages from the Sent items folder ArchiveDeletes all messages from the Archive folder User defined foldersDisplays all user defined folders that the user has added under My folders after the predefined folders. Only folders created in My folders can be deleted. The Inbox, Sent items, Archive, and Templates folders are protected. When a folder is deleted, all messages in the folder are also deleted 3. Select OK to empty the folder. n Message settings Change sending options Note: Some or all of the following Sending options may be available as determined by your carrier. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Message settings > Sending options and select the setting to change:
PrioritySets the priority of the note to Normal or Urgent.
Delivery noteReceives a note confirming delivery of the message. Select On or Off. 36 M e s s a g e s
Send callback numberSends a callback number to the recipient. Select Off or enter your phone number. Change message settings In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Message settings > Other settings, and one of the following options:
Message font sizeSelect Small font or Large font.
Message overwritingSelect Sent items only, Inbox only, S. items & inbox, or Off.
Save to Sent items as sendingSelect Always save, Always prompt, or Off. When the message memory is full, your phone cannot send or receive any new messages. However, you can set your phone to automatically overwrite selected messages in the Inbox or Sent items folders when new messages arrive. n Voice messages If you subscribe to voice mail, your wireless provider will furnish you with a voice mailbox number. Save this number to your phone to use voice mail. When you receive a voice message, your phone either beeps, displays a message, or both. If you receive more than one message, the number of messages received is displayed. Save voice mailbox number To see or save your voice mailbox number, in the standby mode, select Menu >
Messages > Voice messages > Voice mailbox number.
If your wireless provider has already saved your voice mailbox number to your phone, the number appears in the display. Select OK to leave the number unchanged.
If the number entry window is empty, enter the voice mailbox area code and number, and select OK Call and setup your voice mail 1. Once you have saved the voice mailbox number, press and hold 1. 2. When you connect to voice mail and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the services automated instructions to setup your voice mail. 37 M e s s a g e s Listen to your voice messages To dial the voice mailbox number and listen to your voice messages, perform one of the following:
Dial the number using the keypad.
Press and hold 1.
If there is a notification message in the display, select Listen .
In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Voice messages > Listen to voice messages. Once you connect and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the automated instructions to listen to your voice messages. Automate voice mail Special characters, called dialing codes, can be added to phone numbers. Dialing codes instruct the receiving system to pause, wait, bypass, or accept the numbers that follow them in the dialing string. See "Insert dialing codes," p. 39. Voice mail services vary by service provider. The following instructions are examples of common operations. Please check with your service provider for specific instructions for using your voice mail service. Set up voice mail with dialing codes 1. Write down your voice mailbox number. 2. Call and check your voice mail as you normally would. 3. Write down your interaction with the recorded prompts step-by-step. Keep in mind that each voice mail service may vary. However, it should be similar to the following:
Dial 2145551212, pause 5 seconds, press 1, pause 2 seconds, press 1234, press #. In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. 4. 5. Scroll to an (empty) 1-touch dialing slot and select Assign. 6. Enter your voice mailbox number, including the area code. 7. Enter any dialing codes as necessary using the information that you wrote down. 38 M e s s a g e s If you pause for 5 seconds after connecting to voice mail, enter p twice after the voice mailbox number; for example, 2145551212pp. 8. Enter any remaining pauses or other information that allows you to listen to your messages, and select OK. 9. Enter a name (such as voice mail), and select OK. To dial and listen to your voice mail, in the standby mode, press and hold the assigned 1-touch dialing key. Insert dialing codes Press * repeatedly to cycle through the dialing codes. Once the desired code appears in the display, pause briefly. The code is inserted into the dialing string. The following dialing codes are available:
* Bypasses a set of instructions
+ International prefix p Pauses for 2.5 seconds before sending the numbers that follow w Waits for you to press the call key before sending the numbers or codes that follow Minibrowser messages To retrieve minibrowser messages, in the standby mode, select Menu > Messages
> Minibrowser messages > With connect to launch the minibrowser, or Back to escape and return to Messages. 39 C a l l l o g 6. Call log Call log stores information about the last 20 missed, 20 received, and 20 dialed calls. It also stores the duration of all calls. When the number of calls exceeds the maximum, the most recent call replaces the oldest. To view information for Missed calls, Received calls, or Dialed numbers, choose from the following options:
Call timeDisplays the date and time of the call Send messageSends a message to the number View numberDisplays the number Use numberEdits the number and associates a name with the number SaveEnters a name for the number and saves it to your contacts list Add to contactAdds the number to an existing entry in your contacts list, if the number is not associated with a name DeleteClears the number from memory CallCalls the number n View missed calls Missed calls are calls that were never answered. The missed calls feature does not function when your phone is switched off. If the message icon appears in the display, select List and highlight the missed call. Select Options. From the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Missed calls. Highlight a missed call and select Options. n View received calls Received calls are calls that have been answered. In the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Received calls. Highlight a received call and select Options. n View dialed numbers Dialed numbers were called previously from your phone. In the standby mode, press the call key, or select Menu > Call log > Dialed numbers. Highlight a name or number and select Options. 40 C a l l l o g Call times To view up to five calls with the time each call occurred, your phone clock must be set. 1. Select Options > Call time. 2. Scroll through the calls listed to view the most recent call times made from this number. 3. Select Back to return to the options list. n Delete call logs To delete any missed, dialed, or received calls from phone memory, in the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Delete recent call lists and select the call type to clear: All, Missed, Received or Dialed. n View duration of calls Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. To activate the call timer, in the standby mode and while in a call, select Details >
Show call time on display > On or Off. Note: Some timers, including the life timer, may be reset during service or software upgrades. To determine the duration of your calls, select Menu > Call log > Call timers, and Duration of last call, Duration of dialed calls (Home or Roaming), Duration of received calls (Home or Roaming), Duration of all calls, Life timer, Clear timers Clear timers sets all call timers, except the life timer, to zero. Enter your security code, and OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. View duration of data and fax calls Data and fax calls are network services. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can view the size or duration of sent or received data and fax calls. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and services by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. 41 C a l l l o g In the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Data/fax calls. 1. 2. Select Last sent data/fax, Last received data/fax, All sent data/fax, All received data/fax, Duration of last data/fax call, Duration of all data/fax calls, to view duration of calls; or Clear all data/fax logs > OK > Yes to clear all data or fax logs. View duration of minibrowser Minibrowser is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can view the size or duration of sent or received data from the minibrowser. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and services by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. In the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Minibrowser calls. 1. 2. Select Last sent browser data, Last received browser data, All sent browser data, All received browser data, Last browser session, All browser sessions; or select Clear all browser logs > OK > Yes to clear all browser logs. 42 7. Profiles P r o f i l e s Profiles define how your phone reacts when you receive a call or message, how your keypad sounds when you press a key, and more. Ringing options, keypad tones, and other settings for each of the available profiles can be left at their default setting, or customized to suit your needs. The following profiles are available: Normal, Silent, Meeting, Outdoor, and Pager. Profiles are also available for enhancements such as a headset and car kit. See
"Enhancement settings," p. 52, for more information about enhancement profiles. n Activate In the standby mode, select Menu > Profiles > select the profile of your choice >
Activate. In the standby mode, select Menu > Profiles. n Customize a profile You can customize the profiles in a variety of ways. You cannot rename the Normal profile. 1. 2. Highlight the profile you wish to customize and select Customize. 3. Select the option you want to customize: Incoming call alert, Ringing tone, Ringing volume, Vibrating alert, Message alert tone, Keypad tones, Warning tones, Alert for, or Profile name. n Set a timed profile Timed profiles can prevent missed calls. For example, if you attend an event that requires your phone to be Silent, but you may forget to return it to Normal. A timed profile returns your phone to the default profile at the time you specify. Timed profiles can be set up to 24 hours in advance. 1. 2. Select the profile you wish to activate and select Timed for timed expiration. 3. Enter the time for the profile to expire, and select OK. In the standby mode, select Menu > Profiles. 43 S e t t i n g s 8. Settings Use this menu to change the time settings, call settings, phone settings, display settings, tone settings, enhancement settings, security settings, network, network services, and to restore the factory settings. n Call settings Location information sharing Location information sharing is a network service and must be supported by your wireless service provider. See "Network services," p. 5, for more information. Location info sharing allows the phone to share position information over the network. For calls to emergency numbers, this position information may be used by the emergency operator to determine the location of the phone. The functionality and accuracy of this feature is dependent on the network, satellite systems, and the agency that receives the information. It may not function in all areas or at all times. Location information is always shared with the network during emergency calls to the official emergency number programed into the phone, regardless of which setting is selected. After you place an emergency call the phone remains in emergency mode for five minutes. During this time, the location information is shared with the network. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Location info sharing > 911 only or Location on > OK > OK. 911 onlyThis is the default profile. The phone location information is shared only during an emergency call to the official emergency number programed into your phone. The phone screen displays in the upper left hand corner when in the standby mode. Location onThe phone location information is shared with the network whenever the phone is powered on and activated. The screen displays upper left-hand corner when in the standby mode. in the Anykey answer Anykey answer allows you to answer an incoming call with a brief press of any key except the power, right selection, or end key. 44 S e t t i n g s In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Anykey answer >
On or Off. Automatic redial Occasionally, your network may experience heavy traffic, which results in a fast busy signal when you dial. With automatic redial activated, your phone redials the number (number of times is specified by the network), and notifies you once the network is available. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Automatic redial >
On or Off. 1-touch dialing To activate or deactivate 1-touch dialing. In the standby mode, select Menu >
Settings > Call settings > 1-touch dialing > On or Off. See "Set up 1-touch dialing," p. 27. Automatic update of service Your phone can receive updates to wireless services sent to your phone by your service provider. This option is a network service. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Auto-update of service > On or Off. Minibrowser confirmation To activate minibrowser confirmation, in the standby mode, select Menu >
Settings > Call settings > Minibrowser confirmation > None, On connection, On exit, or Both. Calling cards If you use a calling card for long distance calls, save the calling card number in your phone. The phone can store up to four calling cards. Contact your calling card company for more information. Save information 1. 2. Enter your security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 56. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Calling card. 45 S e t t i n g s 3. Scroll to one of the four card memory locations, and select Options > Edit >
Dialing sequence. 4. Select one of the following sequence types:
Access no. + phone no. + card no.Dial the 1-800 access number, phone number, then enter the card number (plus PIN if required). Access no. + card no. + phone no.Dial the 1-800 access number, card number (plus PIN if required), then enter the phone number. Prefix + phone no. + card no.Dial the prefix (numbers that must precede the phone number) and phone number, then enter the card number (plus PIN if required). 5. Enter the required information (access number or prefix and card number), and select OK to confirm your entries. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Calling card. 6. Select Card name > enter the card name > OK. Make calls After you have saved your calling card information in your phone, make a call with your calling card. 1. 2. Enter your security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 56. 3. Scroll to the calling card of your choice, select Options > Select > OK. 4. Press the end key to return to the standby mode and enter the phone number, including any prefix (such as 0 or 1) that your calling card may require when you make a calling card call. See your calling card for instructions. 5. Press and hold the call key for a few seconds until Card call is displayed. 6. When you hear the tone or system message, select OK. International prefix To store an international dialing prefix into your phone, enter + at the beginning of a phone number. Your phone automatically inserts the international dialing prefix that you stored. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > International prefix. 2. Enter the international dialing prefix (for example, 0011), and select OK. 46 S e t t i n g s 3. In the standby mode, enter + (press * key twice) and the phone number to call
(for example, +3546789). The phone calls the international dialing prefix you have stored in your phone and the phone number you have entered (for example, the phone calls 0011354789). Call summary Your phone can display the time spent on a call when you hang up. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Call summary > On or Off. n Phone settings Phone language In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Phone language, and select the language. The phone language you choose affects the time and date formats of the clock, alarm clock, and calendar. Automatic keyguard To set the keypad of your phone to lock automatically after a preset time delay
(from 10 seconds to 60 minutes), do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Automatic keyguard > On or Off. If you select On, Set delay: is displayed. 2. 3. Enter the delay (in minutes and seconds), and select OK. Important: When keyguard is on, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into your phone. Enter the emergency number, and press the call key. The number is displayed only after you enter the last digit. 47 S e t t i n g s Touch tones Touch tones sound when you press the keys on your phone keypad. You can use touch tones for many automated dial-up services such as banking and airlines, or for entering your voice mailbox number and password. Touch tones are sent during an active call and can be sent manually from your phone keypad, or sent automatically by saving them in your phone. Set type 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Touch tones
> Manual touch tones. 2. Select one of the following options:
ContinuousSets tone sounds for as long as you press and hold a key FixedSends tones of the duration you specify in the Touch tone length option OffTurns off tones. No tones are sent when you press a key Set length To specify touch tone length when using the Fixed option, in the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Touch tones > Touch tone length >
Short (0.1 seconds) or Long (0.5 seconds). Welcome note You can write a welcome note that briefly appears on the display screen whenever you switch your phone on. Predictive text input is not available for entering welcome note text 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note. 2. Enter a note (up to 44 characters). Press * to display and select from the available special characters. 3. When you are finished, select Options > Save to save the welcome note or Delete to delete the previous text and create another welcome note. 48 S e t t i n g s Help text Your phone displays brief descriptions for most menu items. These descriptions are called help text. The default setting for help text is On. To turn help text on or off, in the standby mode, select Menu >Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off. When Help text activation in turned On, select a feature or menu, pause for 10 to 15 seconds, and wait for the help text to display. Use the scroll keys to view the complete help text, if necessary. n Time and date settings Time Show or hide the clock In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Show clock or Hide clock. Set the time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Set the time. 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you selected 12-hour format). Change the format In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Time format > 24-hour or 12-hour. Date Show or hide the date In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date > Show date or Hide date. Set the date 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date > Set the date. 2. Enter the date, and select OK. 49 S e t t i n g s In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date. Change the date format 1. 2. Scroll to Date format, and select a format. 3. Scroll to and select the Date separator. 4. Select a separator. Set the auto-update of date and time Auto-update is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can allow the digital network to set the clock, which is useful when you are out of your home area, or when you have traveled to another network or time zone. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Auto-update of date & time > On, Confirm first, or Off. If you use the Auto-update of date & time option while outside your digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually. Network time will replace the time and date when you re-enter your digital network. If your battery has been removed or has drained outside the digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually (once the battery is replaced or recharged, and if you are still outside of the digital network). n Display settings Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background picture (wallpaper) in the standby mode. To activate or deactivate wallpaper, in the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper > On or Off. To select the wallpaper you wish to display, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings >
Wallpaper > Select wallpap. 2. Highlight the Graphics folder, and select Open. 3. Browse the folder. 4. When you find an image, select Options > Set as wallpap. 50 S e t t i n g s Color scheme You can change the color of some display components in your phone, such as indicators and signal bars. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Color schemes. 2. Select the color scheme of your choice. Banner Banner is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, choose whether the display shows the operator logo when the phone is in the idle state. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Banner >
Default or Customize. Screen saver timeout If you have turned the screen saver on, the screen saver is activated when no function of the phone is used after a preset period of time. Press any key to deactivate the screen saver. You can set your phone to display a screen saver after a preset time or after a custom time (up to 60 minutes) of your choosing. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Screen 1. saver time-out. 2. Scroll to and select the option of your choice. 3. To set a custom time (up to 60 minutes), select Other, enter the custom time, and select OK. Display brightness You can change the brightness of your phone display. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Display brightness. 2. Scroll up or down to adjust the brightness level to your preference. 3. Select OK to accept your settings. 51 S e t t i n g s n Tone settings From this menu, you can adjust the ringing volume, keypad tones, and other tone settings for the active profile. See "Customize a profile," p. 43, for more information on profile settings. Select Menu > Settings > Tone settings, and one of the following options:
Incoming call alertSelect how the device notifies you of an incoming call. Ringing toneSelect the ringing tone for incoming calls. Ringing volumeSet the volume of your ringing tone. Vibrating alertTurn the vibrating alert On or Off. Message alert toneSelect the tone for received messages. Keypad tonesSet the volume of your keypad tones (or turn them off). Warning tonesTurn warning and confirmation tones On or Off. Alert forDefine which caller groups the selected profile will accept or decline. n Phone details From this menu, you can check details of your phone service. Select Menu >
Settings > Phone details, and one of the following options:
User detailsDisplay the mobile ID number (MIN) and own number (MDN). Version detailsDisplay the phone model, hardware version, and software version of the phone. System detailsDisplay the system ID, channel, preferred roaming list (PRL), mode, and frequency of the phone service. n Enhancement settings The enhancement settings menu is shown only if the phone is or has been connected to a compatible enhancement. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > Headset, Handsfree, Loopset, TTY/TDD (carrier dependent), or Charger. Headset Scroll to and select an option of your choice, to enter the submenu and modify its settings. 52 S e t t i n g s Default profileChoose the profile you wish to be automatically activated when a headset is connected. Automatic answerAnswered calls are automatically after one ring when a headset is connected. Select On or Off. Handsfree Scroll to and select an option, to enter the submenu and modify its settings. Default profileSelect the profile you wish to automatically activate when your phone is connected to a car kit. See also "Customize a profile," p. 43. Automatic answerSet so calls are answered automatically after one ring when a car kit is connected. Select On or Off. LightsChoose to keep the phone lights always on or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Select On or Automatic. Loopset The LPS-4 Loopset (for use with T-coil equipped hearing aids) is recommended for use with your phone. Scroll to and select the option of your choice, to enter the submenu and select Use loopset > Yes or No to modify the settings. TTY/TDD This feature is dependent on your carrier. In addition to the Nokia phone, you will need the following for TTY/TDD communication:
A TTY/TDD device that is cellular ready or cellular compatible.
A cable for connecting the TTY/TDD to your Nokia phone, usually supplied by the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device. Set up the TTY/TDD profile To connect your phone directly to the TTY/TDD device, set up the TTY/TDD profile. 1. Connect one end of the cable to the TTY/TDD device. 2. 3. Insert the other end of the cable into the headset jack. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > TTY/
TDD > Use TTY > Yes. 53 S e t t i n g s TTY/TDD calls Important: Some manufacturers of TTY/TDD devices suggest that the phone be at least 18 inches from the TTY/TDD device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide or contact its manufacturer for detailed instructions and safety information.
Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device for a connecting cable that is compatible with the Nokia phone.
TTY/TDD communications depend on network availability. Check with your service provider for availability and description of services. Make a call 1. In the standby mode, enter the number, and press the call key. 2. When the receiving party answers, begin typing your conversation on the TTY/
TDD. 3. Press the end key to end the call. Receive a call 1. Make sure the TTY/TDD device is connected to your phone. 2. Press the call key to answer the call, and type your responses on the TTY/TDD. 3. Press the end key to end the call. Charger In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > Charger, and one of the following options:
Default profileChoose the profile you wish to be automatically activated when your phone is connected to the charger. LightsChoose to keep the phone lights always on or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Select On or Automatic. n Security settings Restrict calls Call restriction is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can restrict the calls your phone can make and receive. When calls are restricted, calls still may be 54 S e t t i n g s possible to the official emergency number programed into your phone. Contact your service provider for the restriction password. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Call restrictions. 2. Enter the security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 56. 3. Select the type of calls you wish to restrict:
Restrict outgoing callsCalls cannot be made: Select, Add restriction, Edit, or Delete. Restrict incoming callsCalls cannot be received: Select or All calls. Activate or deactivate phone lock The phone lock feature protects your phone from unauthorized outgoing calls or unauthorized access to information stored in the phone. When phone lock is activated, Phone locked is displayed each time you turn your phone on. When the device is locked, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. Call not allowed is displayed if you attempt to place a call while phone is locked. To answer a call with phone lock on, select Answer or the call key. 1. 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 56. 3. Select one of the following options:
In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Phone lock.
OnTurns on the phone lock feature after power on.
OffImmediately turns off the phone lock feature. If you selected On, you must enter your lock code and the lock code must be accepted before the phone will function normally. Allow numbers when phone locked When phone lock is on, the only outgoing calls that can be made are to the emergency number programed into your phone (for example, 911) and the number stored in the Allowed number when phone locked location. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Allowed number when phone locked. 2. Enter the lock code and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 56. 55 S e t t i n g s 3. Enter the phone number; or select Search to recall the number from the phone book, and select OK. 4. Press the call key to press the call. Lock code When you change your lock code, make sure you store it in a safe place, away from your phone. Avoid entering access codes similar to emergency numbers such as 911 to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. The preset lock code is 1234. If you enter an incorrect lock code five times in a row, your phone will prompt you for the 5-digit, security code. If you enter the wrong lock code five times in succession, you will not be able to enter a code for 5 minutes, even if you power off the phone between incorrect entries 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change lock code. 2. Enter the current (or default) lock code, and select OK. 3. Enter the new lock code (must be 4 characters in length), and select OK. 4. Reenter the new lock code for verification, and select OK. Voice privacy Voice privacy is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, the voice privacy feature protects the privacy of your current phone conversation from other callers placing phone calls on your same network. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Voice privacy >
On or Off. n Network The menu options you see in your phone are based on your service providers network. The network determines which options actually appear in the phone menu. Check with your service provider for more information. The Network menu allows you to customize the way your phone chooses a network in which to operate while you are within or outside of your primary or home system. Your phone is set to search for the most cost-effective network. If your phone cannot find a preferred network, it selects a network automatically based on the option you choose in the Network menu. 56 S e t t i n g s Roaming options To set your phone to roam or search for another network when you are not in your home area, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Roaming options. 2. Select one of the following options:
Home onlyMake and receive calls in your home area only. AutomaticPhone automatically searches for service in another digital network. If one is not found, the phone uses analog service. The roaming rate applies when you are not in the home service area. 3. Select OK, if necessary, to confirm the activation. Mode You can choose whether your phone uses digital or analog service. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Mode, and one of the following service options:
Digital pref.The phone works in digital mode but will also work in analog mode when digital mode is unavailable. Digital onlyThe phone only works in digital mode. Analog onlyThe phone only works in analog mode. n Network services The following features are network services. See "Network services," p. 5. Store a feature code 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Network feature setting. 2. Enter the feature code from your service provider (for example, *633 Forward if busy), and select OK. 3. Select the type of forwarding that matches the feature code you entered (for example, Call forwarding). The activated feature code is now stored in your phone, and you are returned to the Feature code: field. Continue entering other feature codes (for 57 S e t t i n g s example, *633), or press the end key to return to standby mode. Once you enter a network feature code successfully, the feature becomes visible in the Network services menu. Call forwarding Call forwarding tells your network to redirect incoming calls to another number. Call forwarding is a network service and may not work the same in all networks, so contact your wireless provider for availability. Activate 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding and select one of the following options:
Forward all calls Forward if busy Forward if not answered Forward if out of reach Cancel all call forwarding 2. Select Activate. 3. Scroll to and select the destination to which your calls will be forwarded. 4. Enter the number to which your calls, data, or other information will be forwarded, and select OK. Call waiting If your wireless provider supports this feature, call waiting notifies you of an incoming call even while you are in a call. You can then accept, decline, or ignore the incoming call. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call waiting > Activate or Cancel. 2. During a call, select Answer or the call key to answer the waiting call. The first call is put on hold. 3. Press the end key to end the active call. 58 S e t t i n g s Send own caller ID when calling If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can prevent your number from appearing on the receiving party caller ID. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Send my caller ID > Yes or No. Select your own phone number If your wireless service provider supports this feature, and you have more than one number, you can select the number to be used. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Own number selection. n Restore factory settings This option resets some of the menu settings to their original values. It does not delete data that you have entered or downloaded, or affect entries in your contacts list. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Restore factory settings. Enter the security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 56. 59 G a l l e r y 9. Gallery Pictures and ringing tones can be saved to folders in the Gallery, or to folders created of your own. Images and tones can be downloaded using web sites or Nokia PC Suite. n Open the gallery In the standby mode, select Menu > Gallery where you can View folders, Add folder, Delete folder, and Rename folder. n View folders 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Gallery > View folders > Images, Graphics, or Tones > Open. 2. Scroll to and select an image, graphic or tone, and Options > Open, Delete, Move, Rename, Set as ring tone or Set as wallpap., Details or Sort. 60 G a m e s 10. Games Challenge yourself or a friend to one of the fun games in your phone. Some menus listed are network services. Contact your wireless provider for more information. n Play a game In the standby mode, select Menu > Games > Select game. 1. 2. Scroll to a game, and select Options > Open or the call key. 3. Select one of the following options (if supported by the particular game):
New gameLaunch a new game. High scoresView the high scores for this game (if previously played). InstructionsView instructions for playing the game. Scroll down to read more. n Game settings 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Games. 2. Scroll to and select one of the following game submenus:
Select gameSelect a game or enter a game option list. See "Game details," p. 61. MemoryCheck the available memory for games and game-related applications. SettingsTurn Game sounds, Game lights, and Shakes on or off. n Game details To display the name, version, and size of a selected game, select Options >
Details. 61 V o i c e 11. Voice n Voice tag dialing You can dial up to 25 stored numbers using voice tag dialing. Before using voice tags, note that:
Voice tags are not language-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice.
You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it.
Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags ,and use them in a quiet environment.
Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Voice tags use may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. Assign a voice tag Before you use voice dialing, assign a voice tag to the number. 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to enter the contacts list. 2. Highlight the contact you want to assign a voice tag, select Details >
Options > Add voice tag > Start. 3. Speak clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone automatically stops recording, saves, and replays the voice tag. The icon is displayed next to commands that have voice tags assigned. If the recording is not successful, your phone displays Voice system error. Select Options > Add voice tag, and repeat Step 3. Dial a number 1. In the standby mode, select and hold Contacts. When you hear several beeps and Speak now is displayed, release Contacts. 62 V o i c e 2. Pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. When the phone finds the voice tag, Found: is displayed, and the phone automatically dials the number. If the phone does not locate a number or recognize the voice tag, No match found is displayed. Voice tags After you have associated a voice tag to a contact, in the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice tags > Options > Playback, Change, or Delete. n Voice commands Set as many as five voice commands, to allow hands-free operation of certain phone features. Assign a voice tag to a command Before using voice commands, you must first add a voice tag to the phone function. 1. 2. Select the phone function you wish to tag: Profiles, Voice mailbox, Voice In the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice commands. 3. recorder or Call log. If necessary, scroll to an option associated with that function, select Options > Add command. 4. Select Start, and speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone replays and saves the recorded tag. that have voice tags assigned. appears next to commands Activate a voice command After you have associated a voice tag with a phone function, you can issue a command by speaking the voice tag. 1. Select and hold Contacts. 2. When Speak now appears, pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. 63 V o i c e When the phone finds the voice tag, Found: is displayed, and the phone plays the recognized voice tag through the earpiece. The function you requested is activated. Options After you have associated a voice tag to a command, in the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice commands > Options > Playback, Change, or Delete. n Voice recorder This feature allows you to record speech or sound with your phone and listen to them later. The total available time is 30 seconds if no memos have been stored. The maximum length of a recording depends on how much memory remains available. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. Record speech or sound 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice recorder > Record. 2. After the recorder start tone is heard, begin recording speech or sound. 3. When you are finished recording, select Stop. 4. Enter the title for the recording, and select OK. Options After you have saved the recording to the Recordings list, highlight the recording, and select one of the following options: Playback, Delete, Edit title, and Alarm or Add alarm. 64 12. Minibrowser M i n i b r o w s e r Minibrowser is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. Your phone has a built-in browser you can use to connect to selected services on the mobile internet. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, then you can view weather reports, check news or flight times, view financial information, and much more. The web browser on your phone can display WAP-
based content. Your device may have some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as you would with any Internet site. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. n Mobile internet access Because mobile internet content is designed to be viewed from your phone, your wireless provider is now your mobile internet service provider as well. It is likely that your wireless provider has created a home page and set up your browser to go to this page when you log on to the mobile internet. Once at your service providers home page, you may find links to a number of other sites. It should not be necessary to manually configure the browser on your phone. Normally this is done by your wireless provider once you have subscribed to the feature. Contact your wireless provider if you have problems using the browser. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. n Sign on to the mobile internet At the start screen, select Menu > Minibrowser > Connect. After a brief pause, your phone attempts to connect to your wireless providers home page. If you receive an error message, your phone may not be set up for 65 M i n i b r o w s e r browsing. Contact your wireless provider to make sure that your phone is configured properly. n Navigate the mobile internet Since your phone screen is much smaller than a computer screen, mobile Internet content is displayed differently than you may be accustomed to seeing. This section contains guidelines for using phone keys to navigate a WAP site. Phone keys
To display the Minibrowser main menu, press the power key.
To browse the WAP site, scroll up or down.
To choose a highlighted item, Select.
To enter letters and numbers, press a key from 09.
To enter special characters, press *.
To change input modes, press #. Receive a call while online Depending on your wireless service provider, you may still be able to receive a voice call while using the WAP browser.
To answer the incoming call, press the call key.
To decline the incoming call, press the end key. After you end your voice call, the mobile internet connection automatically resumes. If your wireless service provider does not support incoming calls while browsing, the incoming calls are automatically forwarded to voice mail Make an emergency call while online You can end your data connection and make an emergency call. 1. To close your mobile internet connection, press and hold the end key, or press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 2. Enter the emergency number for your present location (for example, 911), and press the call key. Emergency numbers vary by location. 66 13. Organizer O r g a n i z e r Your phone contains features to help organize your everyday life, including an alarm clock, calendar, calculator, countdown timer, and stopwatch. n Alarm clock In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time. Set an alarm The alarm clock is based on the phone clock. The alarm sounds an alert for any time you specify. 1. 2. Enter the time for the alarm (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you select 12-hour format). Alarm on is displayed briefly in the display, and standby mode. is displayed in the Change the time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time >
On. 2. Enter the time for the alarm (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you select 12-hour format). Alarm on is displayed briefly, and is displayed in the standby mode. Set the alarm tone You can set the tone to play when the alarm sounds. 1. 2. Highlight Standard, Ringing tone, or Open Gallery; and select a tone. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm tone. Alarm conditions When the alarm sounds, your phone beeps, vibrates (if vibrating alert is on for the currently active profile), and lights up the display. If you do not press a key, the alarm stops (snoozes) for 10 minutes, then sounds again. 67 O r g a n i z e r With the phone on, select Stop to shut the alarm off, or select Snooze. The alarm stops for 10 minutes and Snooze on is displayed. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop, the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Turn an alarm off In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time > Off. n Calendar The calendar tracks reminders, calls to make, meetings, and birthdays. It can even sound an alarm for any of these events. Monthly view provides an overview of the selected month and weeks. It also allows you to jump to a specific date. Any days or dates that appear in bold font contain calendar notes such as a meeting or reminder. Open In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. Move the cursor in some calendar views with the up and down scroll keys. Go to a date 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Go to date. 2. Enter the date (for example, mm/dd/yyyy), and select OK. Note a specific date You can choose from five types of notes: Meeting, Call, Birthday, Memo, and Reminder. Your phone asks for further information depending on which note you choose. You also have the option to set an alarm for any note that you select. 1. Go to the date for which you want to set a reminder. See "Go to a date," p. 68, in the previous section if you need more information. 68 O r g a n i z e r 2. From the monthly view (with the go to date highlighted), select Options >
Make a note, and one of the following note types:
MeetingEnter a subject, a location, and a start and end time. You can then set an alarm. CallEnter a phone number, a name, and the time. You can then set an alarm. BirthdayEnter the persons name, and year of birth. You can then set an alarm. MemoEnter a subject and an end date and set an alarm. ReminderEnter the subject you wish to be reminded about and set an alarm. 3. Enter your note, and select Options > Save. View notes (day view) To view the created calendar notes, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. 2. Scroll to the date that has a note. (Days with notes are in bold font.) 3. Select Options > View day. 4. To view a highlighted note, select Options > View. Send a note 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. 2. Scroll to the date containing the note. Any days containing notes are in bold font. 3. Select Options > View day. 4. Scroll to the note you wish to send, and select Options > Send note > Via 5. calendar or Via text msg. If you selected Via calendar, enter the number for the recipient or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. If you selected Via text msg., the note appears as a text message. 6. 7. Select Add number. 8. Enter the number for the recipient or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. 69 O r g a n i z e r 9. Select Options > Send. Receive notes When you receive a calendar note in calendar-to-calendar (vCal) format, Calendar note received is displayed. When you receive a calendar note as a text message, a message notification appears in the standby mode. You can then view, save, or discard the note and set an alarm for any date and time. n Calculator The calculator in your phone adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, calculates the square and the square root, changes the sign of the number entered, and converts currency values. Note: This calculator has a limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calculator. 2. Enter the first number in the calculation. Press # for a decimal point if necessary. Press * to cycle through the add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/) characters. Pause briefly to select the displayed character. 3. Enter the second number in your calculation. 4. Select Options (equals is highlighted). To perform a square or square root calculation, select Options > Square or Square root. To change the sign, select Options > Change sign, or scroll to the key. Currency converter You can convert foreign currency to domestic directly from the standby mode or from the Calculator menu. 1. In the standby mode, enter a currency amount to convert or select Menu >
Organizer > Calculator, and enter a currency amount to convert. 2. Select Options > To home or To foreign. To homeconverts foreign currency to domestic currency To foreignconverts domestic currency to foreign currency 70 O r g a n i z e r 3. Enter the exchange rate (press # to insert a decimal), and select OK. You can edit the exchange rate at any time. When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calculator > Options >
Exchange rate, and one of the following:
Foreign unit expressed in domestic unitsThe number of home units it takes to make one unit of foreign currency. Domestic unit expressed in foreign unitsThe number of foreign units it takes to make one unit of your home currency. 2. Enter the exchange rate, and select OK. n Countdown timer You can enter a specified countdown time (up to 99 hours and 59 minutes). When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm. The countdown timer only works when the phone is on. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer. Set the countdown timer 1. 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Enter a note for the timer, and select OK. The icon appears in the standby mode when the countdown timer is set. When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm, displays the timer note, and flashes its lights.
Press any key during the alarm to stop the timer.
After 30 seconds the timer alert expires automatically. Change the time After you have set the timer, you can change the time. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer > Set timer:. 2. Enter the new time, and select OK. 3. Leave the note as it was or enter a new note, and select OK. 71 O r g a n i z e r Stop the timer After you have set the timer, you can stop the timer at any time. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer > Stop timer. n Stopwatch Your phone has a stopwatch that can be used to track time. The stopwatch displays time in hours, minutes, seconds and fractions of a second in hh:mm:ss:s format. Using the stopwatch or allowing it to run in the background when using other features increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Measure time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Stopwatch > Split timing or Lap timing > Start. The running time is displayed on the screen. 2. Select Split to note the lapsed time. The timer continues to run. The split time appears below the running time. If you split the time more than once, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. Scroll to see previous measured times. 3. Select Lap to note the lap time. The clock stops, then starts immediately from zero. The lap time appears below the running time. If you take more than one lap time, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. When you select Stop, the total time appears at the top. 4. Select Stop to end the timing. The total time is displayed on the screen. 5. Select Options > Save to save the split or lap time. 6. Enter a name for the measurement, and select OK. If you do not enter a name, the total time is used as the default title for the time. Operation note If you press the end key and return to standby mode, the clock continues to run in the background and To return to the stopwatch screens:
appears in the upper left corner of the screen. 72 O r g a n i z e r In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Stopwatch >Continue. 1. 2. To stop the clock, select Stop. Options The following options are available with the stopwatch: Continue, Show last time, Split timing, Lap timing, View times, and Delete times. 73 P C C o n n e c t i v i t y 14. PC Connectivity With the PC Suite you can, for example, create and send text and picture messages, and synchronize contacts and calendar between your phone and a compatible PC. Some of the features available in PC Suite are carrier dependent. Check www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia Web site for the latest version of this guide, additional information, downloads, and services related to your Nokia product. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. n Nokia PC Suite Nokia PC Suite software is available for the Nokia 2125 and Nokia 2125i, phones. Nokia PC Suite is a collection of powerful tools that you can use to manage your device features and data. Each component is a separate program that includes online helps. Nokia PC Suite software, installation instructions, and other documentation, which are provided free of charge and can be downloaded from the software downloads of the Nokia Web site: www.nokiausa.com/pcsuite. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. n Your phone as a modem You can use your Nokia phone as a modem while connected to a compatible PC, giving you access to the Internet (for sending and receiving e-mail and Web browsing). To use your phone as a modem, install the modem software manually on your PC. The downloadable modem software is on the Nokia website at www.nokiausa.com/support/software/. Modem data service is a network-dependent feature. For availability and subscription to data services, contact your network operator or service provider. 74 15. Enhancements E n h a n c e m e n t s Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-7 or ACP-12. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. A few practical rules about accessories and enhancements.
Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children.
When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Check regularly that enhancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly.
Installation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualified personnel only. Power
Standard 1070 mAh Li-Ion Battery (BL-6C)
Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7)
Travel Charger (ACP-12)
Mobile Charger (LCH-12)
Retractable Charger (AC-1) Audio
Headset (HS-5)
Boom Headset (HDB-4)
Loopset (LPS-4)
FM Radio Headset (HS-2R) 75 E n h a n c e m e n t s
Retractable Headset (HS-10) Data
Data Cable (DKU-5)
CA-43 Cable
Desk Stand with Sync (DCV-15) Car
Full Car Kit (CK-6)
Car Installation Kit (CARK-126)
Mobile Holder (MBC-17)
Mobile Lighter Charger (LCH-12)
Headrest Handsfree (BHF-1) 76 16. Battery information B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n n Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. To prolong battery life of NiMh batteries, discharge the battery from time to time by leaving your device switched on until it turns itself off. Do not attempt to discharge the battery by any other means. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15C and 25C (59F and 77F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. 77 B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose batteries as household waste. n Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the packaging and inspect the hologram label using the following steps:
Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it and take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1.When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2.When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. 78 B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n 3.Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for example 12345678919876543210. Turn the battery so that the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokia.com/
batterycheck. What if your battery is not authentic?
If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery. 79 C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage.
Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it.
Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged.
Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics.
Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards.
Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide.
Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics.
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device.
Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation.
Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses).
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
Use chargers indoors.
Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes, before sending your device to a service facility. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. 80 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n Additional safety information n Operating environment Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 2.2 cm (7/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with a hearing aid should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. n Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cm
(6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should:
81 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n
Always keep the device more than 15.3 cm (6 in) from the pacemaker when the device is switched on.
Do not carry the device in a breast pocket.
Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move the device away. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. n Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. n Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel 82 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. n Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call:
1. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. phone for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. n Certification Information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards and guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of the public, regardless of age and health and to account for any variations in measurements. 83 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit set by ICNIRP is 2.2 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be well below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value when tested according to international testing procedures for use at the ear is 0.72 W/kg. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokiausa.com. USA and Canada: The SAR limit of USA (FCC) and Canada (IC) is 1.6 W/kg averaged over 1 gram of tissue. This device model has also been tested against this SAR limit. The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for use at the ear is 1.21 W/Kg and when properly worn on the body is 1.17 W/kg. Information about this device can be found on the FCC's website at http://
www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid by searching the equipment authorization system using FCC ID: QMNRH-71. n Technical information DimensionsWidth 49.9 mm (1.96 inches); length 108.3 mm (4.26 inches);
depth 23.2 mm (0.91 inches) Weight3.84 oz (108.8 g) with BL-6C Li-Ion Battery Volume5.95 cu in (97.5 cu cm) Frequency range (Tx)PCS 1851.251908.75 MHz;
Cellular 824.70848.37 MHz Frequency range (Rx)PCS 1931.251988.75 MHz;
Cellular 869.70893.37 MHz GPS Frequency1575.42 MHz n Battery information This section provides information about battery charging times with the Travel Charger (ACP-12) and the Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7), talk-times, and standby times. Be aware that the information in this section is subject to change. For more information, contact your service provider. 84 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n Charging times The following charging times are approximate with the BL-6C 1070 mAh Li-Ion battery:
Travel Charger (ACP-12): up to 1 hour 45 minutes Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7): up to 3 hours 45 minutes Talk and standby times Operation times are estimates only and depend on signal strength, phone use, network conditions, features used, battery age and condition (including charging habits), temperatures to which the battery is exposed, and many other factors. Talk time: up to 3.7 hours cellular and 4.1 hours PCS Standby time: up to 12 days n Patent information Manufactured or sold under one or more of the following US patents:
D405445 5491718 5758278 5887250 6025802 6088342 6377813 D406583 5596571 5790957 5887252 6029065 6148209 6414640 D414189 5642377 5793744 5889770 6047071 6154455 6434186 D405784 5699482 5796757 5929813 6055264 6167038 6459689 D423515 5701392 5802465 5990740 6072787 6205325 6463031 4969192 5708656 5821891 5991627 6076181 6253075 6466173 5440597 5737323 5854978 6005889 6078570 6292474 6480700 5444816 5754976 5859843 6009129 6084471 6332083 6480155 6486835 6496150 6570909 6580771 6587685 Others 4558302 4901307 5056109 5101501 5109390 5265119 RE32580 85 IndexNumerics1-touch dialing 27alarm clock 76antenna 13anykey answer 50applications 85automate voicemail 39automatic redial 51automatic update of service 51auto-update 57Bback coverremoving 14replacing 14, 17banner 58batteries and chargers 90batterycharging 14charging times 96removing 14replacing 14, 17talk and standby times 96battery information 96business cards 31Ccalculator 80calendar 77call duration 45call forwarding 66call log 43caller groups 26calling cards 52callsanswering 19in-call options 20making 18care and maintenance 91certification information (SAR) 94chargerconnecting 14information 90times 96color schemes 58contacts list 25add 25delete 29edit 28send 31view 30countdown timer 81currency converter 81customer care 7Ddata/fax calls 53dialing codes 39display language 54display settings 58downloadapplications 85Eemergency calls 94while using wireless Internet 75with keypad locked 55enhancement settings 59handsfree 59headset 59, 60music stand 61TTY/TDD 60enhancements 88ESN 7exchange rate 81FFCC information 94feature codes 65Ggallery 68games 69Hhandsfree 59headset 15, 59, 60help 7help text 12, 56Iindicators and icons 9KKeyguard 20automatic 54Llanguages 54loudspeaker 19Mmessage folders 40messagesdelete 41minibrowser messages 40picture messages 36text messages 32voice messages 38minibrowser 74minibrowser messages 40music stand 61NNetwork Services 6organizer 76Ppatent information 97phone settings 54picture messages 36predictive text 23profiles 48Qquick keys 9Rrestore factory settings 67restrict calls 61Ssafety 4important safety information 92screen saver 58scrolling 12security code 62, 63, 64security settings 61send own caller ID 67setdate 57time 56settings 50shared memory 7shortcuts 12start screen 9stopwatch 82Ttalk and standby times 96technical information 96text entry 22text messages 32time and date settings 56timed profiles 48tone settings 59, 64touch tones 55TTY/TDD 60turn phone off 15turn phone on 15Vviewcall duration 45call times 44data/ call duration 46dialed numbers 44minibrowser duration 46missed calls 43own phone number 67picture messages 37received calls 44saved messages 41voice 70voice commands 71voice dialing 70voice messages 38voice privacy 64voice recorder 72voicemail 38volumeadjusting 19using the loudspeaker 19Wwallpaper 58warranty 111welcome note 55wireless Internet 74make an emergency call 75receive a call while online 75sign on 74XXpress-on covers 16 86
| 1 | Manual 2 | Users Manual | 421.42 KiB | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 |
Nokia 2126 User Guide Issue 1 931169X26 1 LEGAL INFORMATION Part No. 9240272, Issue No. 1 Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nokia 2126, Xpress-on, Pop-Port, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Printed in Canada 2005 US Patent No. 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright 1999-2005. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 2126 product. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED AS IS. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, technology, or software subject to export laws and regulations from the U.S. and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. 2 Table of Contents T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s For your safety 41.Phone at a glance 92.Set up your phone 133.Text entry 214. Contacts list 245.Messages 316.Call log 427.Profiles 468.Settings 479.Gallery 6510.Games 6611.Voice 6712.Minibrowser 7013.Organizer 7314.Applications 8115.PC Connectivity 8216.Enhancements 8417.Battery information 86Care and maintenance 89Additional safety information 91 3 F o r y o u r s a f e t y For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the phone at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. 4 F o r y o u r s a f e t y WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your phone. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. n About your device The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the CDMA 800 and CDMA 1900 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. n Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilize network services. Your service provider may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured. This configuration may include 5 F o r y o u r s a f e t y changes in menu names, menu order and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device require network support for these technologies. n Shared memory The following features in this device may share memory: contacts, text messages, images, and tones in Gallery, calendar notes, games, and applications. Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features sharing memory. Your phone may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. Some of the features, such as images, tones in Gallery, text messages, and applications may have a certain amount of memory specially allotted to them in addition to the memory shared with other features. 6 Welcome W e l c o m e Congratulations on your purchase of the Nokia 2126 mobile phone. Your phone provides many functions that are practical for daily use, such as a hands-free loudspeaker, alarm clock, calculator, calendar. Your phone can also connect to a PC, laptop, or other device using a data cable. To personalize your phone, you can set your favorite ring tones or select an Xpress-onTM color cover. n Get help Find your phone label If you need help, Nokia Customer Care is available for assistance. Before calling, we recommend that you write down the following information and have it available:
Electronic serial number (ESN)
Your zip code The ESN is found on the type label, which is located beneath the battery on the back of the phone. See "Remove the back cover," p. 14 and "Remove the battery," p. 14. Contact Nokia Please have your product with you when contacting either of the numbers below:
Nokia Customer Care Center, USA Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Boulevard, Suite #160 Tampa, Florida 33614 Tel: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Fax: 1-813-249-9619 TTY/TDD users: 1-800-24-NOKIA (1-800-246-6542) Customer Care Center, Canada Nokia Products Ltd. 601 Westney Road South 7 W e l c o m e Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 1-888-22-NOKIA (1-888-226-6542) Fax: 1-905-427-1070 Updates From time to time, Nokia updates this guide to reflect changes. The latest version and an interactive tutorial for this product may be available at the web site www.nokiausa.com. Accessibility solutions Nokia is committed to making mobile phones easy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities. For more information visit the web site at www.nokiaaccessibility.com. 8 1. Phone at a glance P h o n e a t a g l a n c e
Power key and flashlight
(1)
Earpiece (2)
Right selection key (3)
End key (4)
Keypad (5)
Connection port (6)
Microphone (7)
Charger port (8)
Scroll up and down key
(9)
Call key (10)
Left selection key (11)
Display screen (12) n The start screen Depending on your wireless service provider and the model number of your device, some or all of the following selection keys may appear on the start screen. 9 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e The start screen is home base and indicates that your phone is in the standby mode. Signal strength (1)A higher bar indicates a stronger network signal. Battery level (2)A higher bar indicates more charge in the battery. Menu (3)Press the left selection key to select this option. Contacts (4)Press the right selection key to select this option. n Quick keys In the standby mode, press the scroll down key to access the contacts list, and press the scroll up key to activate the flashlight. n Indicators and icons Depending on your wireless service provider and the model number of your phone, some or all of the following indicators and icons may appear in the standby mode:
You have new text or picture messages. See "Text messages," p. 31. You have new voice messages. See "Voice messages," p. 36. Device keypad is locked. See "Keyguard," p. 20. Device is set to the silent profile. See "Profiles," p. 41. Alarm clock is set to on. See "Alarm clock," p. 62. Countdown timer is running. See "Countdown timer," p. 66. Stopwatch timer running in the background. See "Stopwatch," p. 67. Integrated hands-free is active. See "Use the loudspeaker," p. 19. Timed profile is selected. See "Profiles," p. 41. An enhancement is connected to the device. See "Enhancements," p. 70. or Voice privacy encryption is active in the network. See "Security settings," 52. 10 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e or Location info sharing is set to Emergency or On. See "Location information sharing," p. 42. Vibrating alert is active. See "Customize a profile," p. 41. You are roaming outside your home network. See "Roaming options," p. 54. You are in a 1XRTT network. See "Network services," p. 5. You are in a digital network. See "Network services," p. 5. You are in an analog network. See "Network services," p. 5. or Off hook, call or data call in progress. n Phone menus Phone features are grouped according to function and are accessed through the main menus. Each main menu contains submenus and lists from which you can select or view items and customize your phone features. To access these menus and submenus use the scroll method or use a shortcut. Some features may not be available, depending on your network. For more information, contact your wireless provider. The scroll method 1. In the standby mode, select Menu, and scroll up or down through the main menus. As you scroll through the menus, the menu number appears in the upper right corner of the display. Below the number is a scroll bar with a tab that moves up or down on the right side of the display screen as you scroll through the menus. This display provides a visual representation of your current position in the menu structure. 2. When you arrive at a menu, press the left selection key to enter submenus or, when the browser appears on the display, select Connect to enter that menu.
Select Back (the right selection key) to return to the previous menu.
Select the end key from any submenu or select Exit from the main menu level to return to the standby mode. 11 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e Shortcuts To go directly to almost any menu or submenu, as well as activate most features use a shortcut. In the standby mode, select Menu; then within 3 seconds, press the key or keys associated with the menu function you would like to view or activate. For example, to select the meeting profile, select Menu 3-3-1 from standby mode
(Menu > 3 Profiles > 3 Meeting > 1 Activate). After a brief pause, the Meeting profile is activated. In-phone help Many features have brief descriptions (help text) that can be viewed on the display. In order to view the descriptions, you must first activate help text. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off. To view these descriptions, scroll to a feature, and wait for about 15 seconds. Select More, when necessary, to view all of the description, or select Back to exit. 12 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 2. Set up your phone n Antenna Your phone has an internal antenna that is located toward the top of the phone. In the Nokia 2126 phone, the GPS antenna is internal and is activated when you place emergency calls or when Location on is selected from the Location info sharing menu. See "Location information sharing," p. 42. Hold the phone as you would any other telephone with the antenna area pointed up and over your shoulder. Note: As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the device is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna while operating the device optimizes the antenna performance and the battery life. n Change the battery Always switch the device off, and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. 13 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the ACP-7 and ACP-12 chargers. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Note: Always switch off the power and disconnect the charger and any other device before removing the cover . Avoid touching electronic components while changing the cover. Always store and use the device with the cover attached. Remove the back cover 1. With the back of the phone facing you, push down on the back cover release button. 2. Slide the back cover toward the bottom of the phone and remove. Remove the battery After you have removed the back cover, insert your finger into the finger grip, and lift the battery from its compartment. 14 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Replace the battery 1. Position the battery so the positive and negative indicators on the battery match up with the positive and negative indicators on the phone. The battery label should face away from the phone. 2. Insert the battery, gold-colored contact end first, into the battery slot. 3. Push down on the other end of the battery to snap it into place. Replace the back cover Slide the back cover toward the top of the phone until the back cover is securely in place. Charge the battery 1. Plug the charger into a standard ac outlet. 2. Insert the charger output plug into the round jack at the bottom end of the phone. After a few seconds, the battery indicator on the display starts to scroll from bottom to top. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. 15 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e n Turn your phone on or off 1. To turn your phone on or off, press and hold the power key on top of the phone for at least 3 seconds. 2. Enter the lock code. if necessary, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 52. n Connect the headset A compatible headset, such as HS-5, may be purchased with your phone or separately as an enhancement. See "Enhancements," p. 70. Warning: When using the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Important: The headset may affect your ability to hear sounds around you. Do not use this headset in situations that may endanger your safety. 1. Plug the headset connector into the Pop-Port connector at the bottom end of your phone. appears in the standby mode. 2. Position the headset on your ear. With the headset connected, make, answer, and end calls as usual.
Use the keypad to enter numbers.
Press the call key to place a call.
Press the end key to end a call. n Change the Xpress-on covers Note: Always switch off the power, and disconnect the charger and any other device, before removing the cover. Do not touch electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the device with the covers attached. 16 To change the Xpress-on covers, first remove the back cover and battery. S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Remove the front cover Gently pull the bottom of the front cover away from the rest of the phone. Install the keymat and front cover 1. Remove the keymat from the old front cover. 2. Place the keymat into the new front cover. 17 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 3. Press the front cover and keymat against the phone, and snap the front cover into place. 4. Replace the battery and back cover. n Make a call Use the keypad 1. Enter the phone number (including the area code), and press the call key. To delete a character to the left of the cursor, select Clear. 2. Press the end key to end the call, or select End call to cancel the call attempt. Use the contacts list 1. 2. Press the call key to make the call, or select Details to view details of the In the standby mode, scroll down to the entry you wish to view. entry. Use the last dialed number 1. In the standby mode, press the call key to display the last 20 numbers dialed. 2. Scroll to the number (or name) you wish to redial, and press the call key. Conference calls Conference calling is a network service that allows you to take part in a conference call with two other participants. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. With the first participant on the line, select Options > New call. 3. Enter the phone number of the second participant, or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list. 4. Select Flash and the first participant is put on hold. 18 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 5. When the second participant answers, press the call key to connect the calls. 6. To end the conference call, press the end key. n Answer calls Answer, silence, or decline an incoming call Silence and Decline are carrier dependent features. 1. Press the call or Answer key to answer the call. 2. To mute the ringing tone, select Silence. If you do not answer the call, the call is forwarded to voicemail. 3. To dismiss and forward the call to voicemail (a carrier dependent feature), select Decline after you have muted the ringing tone, or press the end key at any time. Answer a call with the keypad locked To answer a call with the keypad locked, press the call key. During the call, all features function normally. When you end, silence or decline the call, the keypad automatically relocks. See "Keyguard," p. 20. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. Adjust the earpiece volume While in a call, scroll up or down to adjust the volume of the earpiece. When you adjust the volume, a bar chart appears in the display to indicate the volume level. Use the loudspeaker You can use your phone as a loudspeaker during a call.
To activate the loudspeaker, select Loudspeaker.
To deactivate the loudspeaker during a call, select Handset. The loudspeaker is deactivated automatically when a call (or a call attempt) ends, or when certain enhancements are connected. 19 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Options during a call Many of the options that used during a call are network services. Check with your wireless service provider for more information. 1. Select Options to display the following:
Mute or UnmuteSilence your end of the call. Loudspeaker or HandsetActivate or deactivate the loudspeaker while in a call. New callInitiate a conference call. See "Conference calls," p. 18. End all callsDisconnect from all active calls. Touch tonesEnter the numbers, and select Tones to send the numbers as tones. ContactsView the contacts list. MenuView the phone menu. 2. Scroll to and select an option to activate the option or enter its submenu. n Keyguard Use keyguard, to lock the keypad and prevent keys from being pressed accidentally. Remember to lock your phone keypad to prevent accidental calls. If the keypad is locked, it unlocks when you receive a call. After the call, the lock automatically reactivates. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your phone. Enter the emergency number and press the call key. See "Automatic keyguard," p. 45. Lock the keypad Select Menu; then press * within 2 seconds. Unlock the keypad Select Unlock; then press * within 2 seconds. 20 3. Text entry T e x t e n t r y You can use two methods for entering text and numbers: standard mode and predictive text mode.
Select Clear to backspace the cursor and delete a character.
Select and hold Clear to backspace continuously and delete characters. n Standard mode Standard mode is the only way to enter text into the contacts list and to rename caller groups. Text (Abc) Press a key once to insert the first letter on the key and twice for the second letter, etc. If you pause briefly, the last letter in the display is accepted and your device awaits the next entry.
Press 0 to enter a space and accept a completed word.
Press 1 to insert a period into your message.
Press and hold * to display a complete list of special characters.
Press and hold # to switch between letters and numbers. Numbers (123) To switch from Abc mode to 123 mode, press and hold # at any message entry screen. Punctuation and special characters While at any text entry screen, press * to display special characters (press and hold * if predictive text is on). Press * again to cycle through all available characters. To navigate through the list of special characters, use the scroll keys. Once a character is highlighted, select Insert to insert the character into your message. 21 T e x t e n t r y n Predictive text mode To write messages quickly, use predictive text mode with your keypad and the built-in dictionary. Predictive text mode is much faster than the standard mode method because you do not need to scroll through the letters on each key to spell a word. The dictionary determines which word to enter based on the keys selected. Activate or deactivate At any text entry screen, select Options > Predictive text > English, Franais, or Espaol to activate predictive text; or select Prediction off to deactivate predictive text. Text entry The illustration below simulates your display each time a key is pressed. For example, to write Nokia with predictive text on and the English dictionary selected, press each of the following keys:
4 6 5 2 6
Press 0 to enter a space, and begin writing the next word.
If a displayed word is not correct, press * to see other matches. To return to the previous word in the list of matches, select Previous.
If ? appears after a word, select Spell to enter the word with the standard mode, and add the word to the dictionary.
Press 1 to insert a period into your message.
Press and hold * to display special characters. Press * again to cycle through all available characters. n Change case and mode Press # to switch between uppercase, lowercase, and sentence case text and between standard and predictive text mode. Case and mode are indicated by the icons that appear in the upper left of the display screen, as follows:
Uppercase text: standard mode is on. 22 T e x t e n t r y Lowercase text: standard mode is on. Sentence case text: standard mode is on. This option is available only at the beginning of a sentence. Uppercase text: predictive text is on. Lowercase text: predictive text is on. Sentence case text: predictive text is on. This option is available only at the beginning of a sentence. 23 C o n t a c t s l i s t 4. Contacts list The contacts list can hold up to 500 contacts with multiple numbers and text notes for each contact. The amount of numbers and text entries that you can save may vary, depending on length and the total number of entries in the contacts list. n Search In the standby mode, select Contacts > Search; highlight the contact you wish to view, and select Details. n Add new contacts In the standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save. Save a name and number 1. 2. Select Options > Save. 3. Enter the contact name, and select OK. Save (only) a number In the standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save; select and hold Options. Save multiple numbers and text items The first number you save for any entry is automatically set as the default. The default setting can be changed later. To save different types of phone numbers and short text items per name to the phone memory, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display a list of entries. Scroll to the entry to which you wish to add a phone number or text item. 2. Select Details > Options > Add number to add a General, Mobile, Home, Work, or Fax number; or Add detail to add an E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note . 3. Enter the number or text for the type you have selected, and select OK. 24 C o n t a c t s l i s t 4. To change the type (E-mail, Web address, Street addr.), select Change type in the options list. To change which phone number is the default number for the contact entry:
1. In the standby mode, scroll down to the entry you wish to change, and select Details. 2. Scroll to the number you wish to set as default, select Options > As primary no. Set up voice tags For more information on setting up voice tags and other voice features, see
"Voice tags," p. 60. Caller groups You can add contact list entries to any of five caller groups, and assign a unique ringing tone or graphic to that group. This enables you to identify callers from the group by their unique ringing tone or graphic. Set up a caller group 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display a list of entries in your contacts list. 2. Scroll to a name you want to add to a caller group, and select Details. 3. Select Options > Caller groups. 4. Scroll to and select the caller group to which you would like to add the name. Options 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Caller groups > Family, VIP, Friends, Business, and Other. 2. Select from following caller group options:
Rename groupRename the group to your preference. Group ringing toneSet the ringing tone for the group. Group logoTurn the graphic for the caller group on or off or view the graphic. Group membersAdd or remove members from the caller group. 25 C o n t a c t s l i s t Set up 1-touch dialing You can associate any entry in the contacts list with a key from 29; then dial those entries by pressing and holding the assigned key. See "1-touch dialing," p. 43 to activate or deactivate 1-touch dialing. Assign a key to 1-touch dialing 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. If 1-touch dialing is off, the phone displays a prompt asking if you would like to turn 1-touch dialing on. Select Yes to activate 1-touch dialing 2. Scroll to an (empty) 1-touch dialing slot, and select Assign. 3. Enter the number (including the area code) and a name for the contact, or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list. 4. Select OK. Change 1-touch dialing numbers 1. 2. Scroll to the 1-touch dialing entry you wish to change, and select Options >
In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. Change. 3. Enter the new number; or search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. 4. Enter a name for the entry, and select OK. In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. Delete 1-touch dialing numbers 1. 2. Scroll to the 1-touch dialing location you wish to delete, and select Options. 3. Select Delete > OK. n Edit contacts list entries 1. 2. Scroll to the entry you would like to edit; select Details and one of the In the standby mode, scroll down to display the contents of your contacts list. following options:
Add voice tag or Voice tagAdd a new voice tag or Playback, Change, or Delete an existing voice tag. Edit numberEdit an existing contact number. 26 C o n t a c t s l i s t Delete numberDelete a phone number from the contact. Use numberDisplay the phone number in the standby mode, ready to be called. ViewView the details of the contact. Change typeChange the number type to General, Mobile, Home, Work, or Fax or the detail type to E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note As primary no.Change the default number of the contact. Add numberAdd a number to the contact. Add detailAdd an address or note to the contact. Caller groupsAdd the contact to an existing caller group. Custom toneAdd a custom ringing tone to the contact. Send bus. cardSend the contact as a business card to another phone. Send messageCreate and send a message to the contact. 1-touch dialingAdd the contact to your speed dial list. Edit nameEdit the name of the contact. View nameView the name of the contact. DeleteDelete the entire contact entry from your contacts list. Edit phone number Highlight the phone number you would like to edit, and select Options. E-mail address entry Highlight the e-mail address entry you would like to send or update, and select Options and one of the following:
Send e-mailSend an e-mail. Edit detailEdit e-mail details. Delete detailDelete e-mail. ViewView the details of the e-mail contact. Change typeChange the e-mail type to E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note. Add detailAdd an E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note to the entry. 27 C o n t a c t s l i s t Add numberAdd a number to the entry. Caller groupsAdd the e-mail to an existing caller group. Custom toneAdd a custom ring tone to the contact. Send bus. cardSend the contact a business card. Edit nameEdit the name of the contact. View nameView the name of the contact. DeleteDelete the entire e-mail entry from your contacts list. Edit Web address 1. Highlight the web address entry you would like to edit, and select Options. 2. Select Web address, Street addr., or Note > OK. n Delete contacts list entries In the standby mode, select Contacts > Delete.
To delete individual entries, select One by one, and scroll to the entry you wish to delete. Select Delete > OK to confirm.
To delete the entire contents of your contacts list, select Delete all > OK. Select OK to confirm or Back to return to Contacts. If OK, enter the security code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 52. n View the contacts list 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts and one of the following options:
SearchFind a name or select from a list. Add newAdd a contact to your contacts list. Edit nameEdit an existing name. DeleteDelete a name and its associated numbers. Add numberAdd a number to an existing name. SettingsChange the contacts list view, check the memory status of your phone. 1-touch dialingView or modify the list of 1-touch dialing numbers. Voice tagsAttach, listen to, or modify a contact voice tag. 28 C o n t a c t s l i s t Own numberView your own phone number. Caller groupsView and edit the properties for any of the caller groups:
Family, VIP, Friends, Business, or Other. 2. Scroll to and select an item to activate the feature or enter its submenu. Fast search for a name 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display your contacts list. 2. Press the key that corresponds to the first letter of the name for which you are performing a search. 3. Scroll up and down to highlight a contact, and select Details to view the details. Configure settings You can choose how the contacts appear in your contacts list and view the amount of memory used or available in your phone. For more information on used and available memory, see "Shared memory," p. 6. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Settings, and one of the following options:
Scrolling viewChoose how names and numbers stored in the contacts list are viewed. Select Name list or Name and no. Memory statusView the amount of memory used in phone book. n Send and receive contacts To send and receive an entry in your contacts list, use text messaging, if supported by your wireless provider. Send a business card To send a business card as a text message to a compatible phone or other handheld device, do the following:
1. Highlight the entry from the contacts list that you wish to send, and select Details > Options > Send bus. card > Via text msg., and do one of the following:
29 C o n t a c t s l i s t
Select Primary no. or All details, if the entry has more than one number or detail.
Enter the number for your recipient.
Select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts list. 2. Select OK , to send the business card. 30 5. Messages M e s s a g e s If you have subscribed to a messaging service through your wireless provider, you can send and receive text messages to compatible phones that also subscribe to a compatible message service. You may also be able to send and receive picture messages and e-mail messages. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the 160 character limit for a single message. Longer messages will be sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options like Chinese, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. The number of characters remaining in a message are indicated by counter in upper right corner of screen. If there are special characters in your message, the indicator may not show the message length correctly. Note: When sending messages, your device may display Message sent. This is an indication that the message has been sent by your device to the message center number programed into your device. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. n Text messages Write and send 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message > Text (select to send an alphanumeric text message) > Add number, Add e-mail, Edit message, List recipients, or Send. 2. Select Add number or Add e-mail to enter the recipients phone number or e-mail address; or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts list. Select OK. 3. Repeat step 2 to add more recipients, and select OK. 31 M e s s a g e s 4. Select Options > Edit message. 5. Compose a message using the keypad, and select Options > Send. Messaging options When you create or reply to a text message, depending on the mode of text input you use and the features supported by your wireless service provider, some or all of the following options are available:
SendSend the message to recipient. List recipientsSend the message to more than one recipient; or delete or edit the recipient list. SettingsSet or change how the message is sent (Urgent, Delivery note, or Callback no.). Save messageSave the message to a folder. Select Sent items, Templates, and Archive. Clear textErase the text clipboard. Exit editorSave the message to your Sent items folder automatically, and exit the message editor. Insert contactInsert a name from your contacts list into your message. Insert numberInsert a phone number or find a phone number in the contacts list, to insert into your message. Use templateInsert a predefined template into your message. Insert word or Edit wordEnter or edit the text of a new word that might not appear in the predictive text dictionary. This displays only when the Predictive text is on. Insert symbolInsert a special character into your message. This displays only when the Predictive text is on. Insert smileyInsert a smiley face into your message. Predictive textChoose a predictive text language, and turn the dictionary on or off. MatchesView matches found in the dictionary for the word you want to use. Templates Templates are short, prewritten messages that can be recalled and inserted into new text messages. 1. Open the blank message creation screen. See "Write and send," p. 31. 32 M e s s a g e s 2. Select Options > Use template. 3. Scroll to and select one of the available templates. 4. Enter the text into your new message, and select Options > Send. Read messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. When you receive a text message, a notification message and are displayed in the upper left corner in the standby mode. When you have unopened messages in your Inbox, 1. Select Show to read the message or Exit to remove the notification icon. is displayed. Scroll to view the whole message, if necessary. 2. Select Options > Reply. 3. Select Empty screen, and compose your reply. 4. To send your reply, select Options > Send. Options When you read a text message, some or all of the following options are available depending on the text input mode and the features supported by your wireless service provider:
DeleteDiscard the message. ReplyReply to the message. Create the message, and select Options >Send. Use numberChoose Save, Add to contact, Send message, or Call. SaveSave the message to a folder. ForwardForward the message to another phone number. RenameEdit the title of the message. n Message folders Save messages To save drafts or received messages to a folder, do the following:
33 M e s s a g e s Open the message or create a new message, and select Options > Save or Save message > Sent items, Archive, Templates, or a folder you created View saved messages 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages. 2. Select the folder containing the message you wish to view:
InboxStores read and unread messages. Sent itemsStores messages send from your phone automatically. ArchiveStores messages you have saved. TemplatesStores pictures and prewritten templates. My foldersProvides a place to organize your messages in custom folders. Select Options > Add folder or Open folder, Rename folder or Delete folder change a folder. 3. Once the folder opens, scroll to and select the message to view. n Delete messages Delete a single message 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages. 2. Scroll to and select the folder containing the message you wish to delete. 3. Select Options > Delete > OK. Select Back to exit. If your message memory is full, Message overwriting is set to off, and you have more messages waiting at the network when No space for new messages is displayed in the standby mode. Delete messages in a folder 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Delete messages. 2. Scroll to the folder containing the messages you wish to delete, and Select one of the following options:
AllDeletes all messages in all folders All readDeletes any messages which have been read in all folders 34 M e s s a g e s All unreadDeletes any messages which have not been read in all folders InboxDeletes all messages from the Inbox folder Sent itemsDeletes all messages from the Sent items folder ArchiveDeletes all messages from the Archive folder User defined foldersDisplays all user defined folders that the user has added under My folders after the predefined folders. Only folders created in My folders can be deleted. The Inbox, Sent items, Archive, and Templates folders are protected. When a folder is deleted, all messages in the folder are also deleted 3. Select OK to empty the folder. n Message settings Change sending options Note: Some or all of the following Sending options may be available as determined by your carrier. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Message settings > Sending options and select the setting to change:
PrioritySets the priority of the note to Normal or Urgent.
Delivery noteReceives a note confirming delivery of the message. Select On or Off.
Send callback numberSends a callback number to the recipient. Select Off or enter your phone number. Change message settings In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Message settings > Other settings, and one of the following options:
Message font sizeSelect Small font or Large font.
Message overwritingSelect Sent items only, Inbox only, S. items & inbox, or Off.
Save to Sent items as sendingSelect Always save, Always prompt, or Off. 35 M e s s a g e s When the message memory is full, your phone cannot send or receive any new messages. However, you can set your phone to automatically overwrite selected messages in the Inbox or Sent items folders when new messages arrive. n Voice messages If you subscribe to voice mail, your wireless provider will furnish you with a voice mailbox number. Save this number to your phone to use voice mail. When you receive a voice message, your phone either beeps, displays a message, or both. If you receive more than one message, the number of messages received is displayed. Save voice mailbox number To see or save your voice mailbox number, in the standby mode, select Menu >
Messages > Voice messages > Voice mailbox number.
If your wireless provider has already saved your voice mailbox number to your phone, the number appears in the display. Select OK to leave the number unchanged.
If the number entry window is empty, enter the voice mailbox area code and number, and select OK Call and setup your voice mail 1. Once you have saved the voice mailbox number, press and hold 1. 2. When you connect to voice mail and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the services automated instructions to setup your voice mail. Listen to your voice messages To dial the voice mailbox number and listen to your voice messages, perform one of the following:
Dial the number using the keypad.
Press and hold 1.
If there is a notification message in the display, select Listen .
In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Voice messages > Listen to voice messages. 36 M e s s a g e s Once you connect and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the automated instructions to listen to your voice messages. Automate voice mail Special characters, called dialing codes, can be added to phone numbers. Dialing codes instruct the receiving system to pause, wait, bypass, or accept the numbers that follow them in the dialing string. See "Insert dialing codes," p. 38. Voice mail services vary by service provider. The following instructions are examples of common operations. Please check with your service provider for specific instructions for using your voice mail service. Set up voice mail with dialing codes 1. Write down your voice mailbox number. 2. Call and check your voice mail as you normally would. 3. Write down your interaction with the recorded prompts step-by-step. Keep in mind that each voice mail service may vary. However, it should be similar to the following:
Dial 2145551212, pause 5 seconds, press 1, pause 2 seconds, press 1234, press #. In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. 4. 5. Scroll to an (empty) 1-touch dialing slot and select Assign. 6. Enter your voice mailbox number, including the area code. 7. Enter any dialing codes as necessary using the information that you wrote down. If you pause for 5 seconds after connecting to voice mail, enter p twice after the voice mailbox number; for example, 2145551212pp. 8. Enter any remaining pauses or other information that allows you to listen to your messages, and select OK. 9. Enter a name (such as voice mail), and select OK. To dial and listen to your voice mail, in the standby mode, press and hold the assigned 1-touch dialing key. 37 M e s s a g e s Insert dialing codes Press * repeatedly to cycle through the dialing codes. Once the desired code appears in the display, pause briefly. The code is inserted into the dialing string. The following dialing codes are available:
* Bypasses a set of instructions
+ International prefix p Pauses for 2.5 seconds before sending the numbers that follow w Waits for you to press the call key before sending the numbers or codes that follow 38 6. Call log C a l l l o g Call log stores information about the last 20 missed, 20 received, and 20 dialed calls. It also stores the duration of all calls. When the number of calls exceeds the maximum, the most recent call replaces the oldest. To view information for Missed calls, Received calls, or Dialed numbers, choose from the following options:
Call timeDisplays the date and time of the call Send messageSends a message to the number View numberDisplays the number Use numberEdits the number and associates a name with the number SaveEnters a name for the number and saves it to your contacts list Add to contactAdds the number to an existing entry in your contacts list, if the number is not associated with a name DeleteClears the number from memory CallCalls the number n View missed calls Missed calls are calls that were never answered. The missed calls feature does not function when your phone is switched off. If the message icon appears in the display, select List and highlight the missed call. Select Options. From the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Missed calls. Highlight a missed call and select Options. n View received calls Received calls are calls that have been answered. In the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Received calls. Highlight a received call and select Options. n View dialed numbers Dialed numbers were called previously from your phone. In the standby mode, press the call key, or select Menu > Call log > Dialed numbers. Highlight a name or number and select Options. 39 C a l l l o g Call times To view up to five calls with the time each call occurred, your phone clock must be set. 1. Select Options > Call time. 2. Scroll through the calls listed to view the most recent call times made from this number. 3. Select Back to return to the options list. n Delete call logs To delete any missed, dialed, or received calls from phone memory, in the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Delete recent call lists and select the call type to clear: All, Missed, Received or Dialed. n View duration of calls Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. To activate the call timer, in the standby mode and while in a call, select Details >
Show call time on display > On or Off. Note: Some timers, including the life timer, may be reset during service or software upgrades. To determine the duration of your calls, select Menu > Call log > Call timers, and Duration of last call, Duration of dialed calls (Home or Roaming), Duration of received calls (Home or Roaming), Duration of all calls, Life timer, Clear timers Clear timers sets all call timers, except the life timer, to zero. Enter your security code, and OK. See "Security settings," p. 52. 40 7. Profiles P r o f i l e s Profiles define how your phone reacts when you receive a call or message, how your keypad sounds when you press a key, and more. Ringing options, keypad tones, and other settings for each of the available profiles can be left at their default setting, or customized to suit your needs. The following profiles are available: Normal, Silent, Meeting, Outdoor, and Pager. Profiles are also available for enhancements such as a headset and car kit. See
"Enhancement settings," p. 50, for more information about enhancement profiles. n Activate In the standby mode, select Menu > Profiles > select the profile of your choice >
Activate. In the standby mode, select Menu > Profiles. n Customize a profile You can customize the profiles in a variety of ways. You cannot rename the Normal profile. 1. 2. Highlight the profile you wish to customize and select Customize. 3. Select the option you want to customize: Incoming call alert, Ringing tone, Ringing volume, Vibrating alert, Message alert tone, Keypad tones, Warning tones, Alert for, or Profile name. n Set a timed profile Timed profiles can prevent missed calls. For example, if you attend an event that requires your phone to be Silent, but you may forget to return it to Normal. A timed profile returns your phone to the default profile at the time you specify. Timed profiles can be set up to 24 hours in advance. 1. 2. Select the profile you wish to activate and select Timed for timed expiration. 3. Enter the time for the profile to expire, and select OK. In the standby mode, select Menu > Profiles. 41 S e t t i n g s 8. Settings Use this menu to change the time settings, call settings, phone settings, display settings, tone settings, enhancement settings, security settings, network, network services, and to restore the factory settings. n Call settings Location information sharing Location information sharing is a network service and must be supported by your wireless service provider. See "Network services," p. 5, for more information. Location info sharing allows the phone to share position information over the network. For calls to emergency numbers, this position information may be used by the emergency operator to determine the location of the phone. The functionality and accuracy of this feature is dependent on the network, satellite systems, and the agency that receives the information. It may not function in all areas or at all times. Location information is always shared with the network during emergency calls to the official emergency number programed into the phone, regardless of which setting is selected. After you place an emergency call the phone remains in emergency mode for five minutes. During this time, the location information is shared with the network. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Location info sharing > 911 only or Location on > OK > OK. 911 onlyThis is the default profile. The phone location information is shared only during an emergency call to the official emergency number programed into your phone. The phone screen displays in the upper left hand corner when in the standby mode. Location onThe phone location information is shared with the network whenever the phone is powered on and activated. The screen displays upper left-hand corner when in the standby mode. in the Anykey answer Anykey answer allows you to answer an incoming call with a brief press of any key except the power, right selection, or end key. 42 S e t t i n g s In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Anykey answer >
On or Off. Automatic redial Occasionally, your network may experience heavy traffic, which results in a fast busy signal when you dial. With automatic redial activated, your phone redials the number (number of times is specified by the network), and notifies you once the network is available. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Automatic redial >
On or Off. 1-touch dialing To activate or deactivate 1-touch dialing. In the standby mode, select Menu >
Settings > Call settings > 1-touch dialing > On or Off. See "Set up 1-touch dialing," p. 26. Automatic update of service Your phone can receive updates to wireless services sent to your phone by your service provider. This option is a network service. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Auto-update of service > On or Off. Calling cards If you use a calling card for long distance calls, save the calling card number in your phone. The phone can store up to four calling cards. Contact your calling card company for more information. Save information 1. 2. Enter your security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 53. 3. Scroll to one of the four card memory locations, and select Options > Edit >
In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Calling card. Dialing sequence. 4. Select one of the following sequence types:
Access no. + phone no. + card no.Dial the 1-800 access number, phone number, then enter the card number (plus PIN if required). 43 S e t t i n g s Access no. + card no. + phone no.Dial the 1-800 access number, card number (plus PIN if required), then enter the phone number. Prefix + phone no. + card no.Dial the prefix (numbers that must precede the phone number) and phone number, then enter the card number (plus PIN if required). 5. Enter the required information (access number or prefix and card number), and select OK to confirm your entries. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Calling card. 6. Select Card name > enter the card name > OK. Make calls After you have saved your calling card information in your phone, make a call with your calling card. 1. 2. Enter your security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 53. 3. Scroll to the calling card of your choice, select Options > Select > OK. 4. Press the end key to return to the standby mode and enter the phone number, including any prefix (such as 0 or 1) that your calling card may require when you make a calling card call. See your calling card for instructions. 5. Press and hold the call key for a few seconds until Card call is displayed. 6. When you hear the tone or system message, select OK. International prefix To store an international dialing prefix into your phone, enter + at the beginning of a phone number. Your phone automatically inserts the international dialing prefix that you stored. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > International prefix. 2. Enter the international dialing prefix (for example, 0011), and select OK. 3. In the standby mode, enter + (press * key twice) and the phone number to call
(for example, +3546789). The phone calls the international dialing prefix you have stored in your phone and the phone number you have entered (for example, the phone calls 0011354789). 44 S e t t i n g s Call summary Your phone can display the time spent on a call when you hang up. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Call summary > On or Off. n Phone settings Phone language In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Phone language, and select the language. The phone language you choose affects the time and date formats of the clock, alarm clock, and calendar. Automatic keyguard To set the keypad of your phone to lock automatically after a preset time delay
(from 10 seconds to 60 minutes), do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Automatic keyguard > On or Off. If you select On, Set delay: is displayed. 2. 3. Enter the delay (in minutes and seconds), and select OK. Important: When keyguard is on, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into your phone. Enter the emergency number, and press the call key. The number is displayed only after you enter the last digit. Touch tones Touch tones sound when you press the keys on your phone keypad. You can use touch tones for many automated dial-up services such as banking and airlines, or for entering your voice mailbox number and password. Touch tones are sent during an active call and can be sent manually from your phone keypad, or sent automatically by saving them in your phone. Set type 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Touch tones
> Manual touch tones. 45 S e t t i n g s 2. Select one of the following options:
ContinuousSets tone sounds for as long as you press and hold a key FixedSends tones of the duration you specify in the Touch tone length option OffTurns off tones. No tones are sent when you press a key Set length To specify touch tone length when using the Fixed option, in the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Touch tones > Touch tone length >
Short (0.1 seconds) or Long (0.5 seconds). Welcome note You can write a welcome note that briefly appears on the display screen whenever you switch your phone on. Predictive text input is not available for entering welcome note text 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note. 2. Enter a note (up to 44 characters). Press * to display and select from the available special characters. 3. When you are finished, select Options > Save to save the welcome note or Delete to delete the previous text and create another welcome note. Help text Your phone displays brief descriptions for most menu items. These descriptions are called help text. The default setting for help text is On. To turn help text on or off, in the standby mode, select Menu >Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off. When Help text activation in turned On, select a feature or menu, pause for 10 to 15 seconds, and wait for the help text to display. Use the scroll keys to view the complete help text, if necessary. 46 S e t t i n g s n Time and date settings Time Show or hide the clock In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Show clock or Hide clock. Set the time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Set the time. 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you selected 12-hour format). Change the format In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Time format > 24-hour or 12-hour. Date Show or hide the date In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date > Show date or Hide date. Set the date 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date > Set the date. 2. Enter the date, and select OK. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date. Change the date format 1. 2. Scroll to Date format, and select a format. 3. Scroll to and select the Date separator. 4. Select a separator. Set the auto-update of date and time Auto-update is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. 47 S e t t i n g s If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can allow the digital network to set the clock, which is useful when you are out of your home area, or when you have traveled to another network or time zone. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Auto-update of date & time > On, Confirm first, or Off. If you use the Auto-update of date & time option while outside your digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually. Network time will replace the time and date when you re-enter your digital network. If your battery has been removed or has drained outside the digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually (once the battery is replaced or recharged, and if you are still outside of the digital network). n Display settings Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background picture (wallpaper) in the standby mode. To activate or deactivate wallpaper, in the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper > On or Off. To select the wallpaper you wish to display, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings >
Wallpaper > Select wallpap. 2. Highlight the Graphics folder, and select Open. 3. Browse the folder. 4. When you find an image, select Options > Set as wallpap. Color scheme You can change the color of some display components in your phone, such as indicators and signal bars. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Color schemes. 2. Select the color scheme of your choice. Banner Banner is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. 48 S e t t i n g s If your wireless service provider supports this feature, choose whether the display shows the operator logo when the phone is in the idle state. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Banner >
Default or Customize. Screen saver timeout If you have turned the screen saver on, the screen saver is activated when no function of the phone is used after a preset period of time. Press any key to deactivate the screen saver. You can set your phone to display a screen saver after a preset time or after a custom time (up to 60 minutes) of your choosing. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Screen 1. saver time-out. 2. Scroll to and select the option of your choice. 3. To set a custom time (up to 60 minutes), select Other, enter the custom time, and select OK. Display brightness You can change the brightness of your phone display. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Display brightness. 2. Scroll up or down to adjust the brightness level to your preference. 3. Select OK to accept your settings. n Tone settings From this menu, you can adjust the ringing volume, keypad tones, and other tone settings for the active profile. See "Customize a profile," p. 41, for more information on profile settings. Select Menu > Settings > Tone settings, and one of the following options:
Incoming call alertSelect how the device notifies you of an incoming call. Ringing toneSelect the ringing tone for incoming calls. Ringing volumeSet the volume of your ringing tone. Vibrating alertTurn the vibrating alert On or Off. Message alert toneSelect the tone for received messages. 49 S e t t i n g s Keypad tonesSet the volume of your keypad tones (or turn them off). Warning tonesTurn warning and confirmation tones On or Off. Alert forDefine which caller groups the selected profile will accept or decline. n Enhancement settings The enhancement settings menu is shown only if the phone is or has been connected to a compatible enhancement. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > Headset, Handsfree, Loopset, TTY/TDD (carrier dependent), or Charger. Headset Scroll to and select an option of your choice, to enter the submenu and modify its settings. Default profileChoose the profile you wish to be automatically activated when a headset is connected. Automatic answerAnswered calls are automatically after one ring when a headset is connected. Select On or Off. Handsfree Scroll to and select an option, to enter the submenu and modify its settings. Default profileSelect the profile you wish to automatically activate when your phone is connected to a car kit. See also "Customize a profile," p. 41. Automatic answerSet so calls are answered automatically after one ring when a car kit is connected. Select On or Off. LightsChoose to keep the phone lights always on or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Select On or Automatic. Loopset The LPS-4 Loopset (for use with T-coil equipped hearing aids) is recommended for use with your phone. Scroll to and select the option of your choice, to enter the submenu and select Use loopset > Yes or No to modify the settings. 50 S e t t i n g s TTY/TDD This feature is dependent on your carrier. In addition to the Nokia phone, you will need the following for TTY/TDD communication:
A TTY/TDD device that is cellular ready or cellular compatible.
A cable for connecting the TTY/TDD to your Nokia phone, usually supplied by the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device. Set up the TTY/TDD profile To connect your phone directly to the TTY/TDD device, set up the TTY/TDD profile. 1. Connect one end of the cable to the TTY/TDD device. 2. 3. Insert the other end of the cable into the headset jack. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > TTY/
TDD > Use TTY > Yes. TTY/TDD calls Important: Some manufacturers of TTY/TDD devices suggest that the phone be at least 18 inches from the TTY/TDD device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide or contact its manufacturer for detailed instructions and safety information.
Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device for a connecting cable that is compatible with the Nokia phone.
TTY/TDD communications depend on network availability. Check with your service provider for availability and description of services. Make a call 1. In the standby mode, enter the number, and press the call key. 2. When the receiving party answers, begin typing your conversation on the TTY/
TDD. 3. Press the end key to end the call. Receive a call 1. Make sure the TTY/TDD device is connected to your phone. 2. Press the call key to answer the call, and type your responses on the TTY/TDD. 3. Press the end key to end the call. 51 S e t t i n g s Charger In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > Charger, and one of the following options:
Default profileChoose the profile you wish to be automatically activated when your phone is connected to the charger. LightsChoose to keep the phone lights always on or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Select On or Automatic. n Security settings Restrict calls Call restriction is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can restrict the calls your phone can make and receive. When calls are restricted, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your phone. Contact your service provider for the restriction password. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Call restrictions. 2. Enter the security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 53. 3. Select the type of calls you wish to restrict:
Restrict outgoing callsCalls cannot be made: Select, Add restriction, Edit, or Delete. Restrict incoming callsCalls cannot be received: Select or All calls. Activate or deactivate phone lock The phone lock feature protects your phone from unauthorized outgoing calls or unauthorized access to information stored in the phone. When phone lock is activated, Phone locked is displayed each time you turn your phone on. When the device is locked, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. Call not allowed is displayed if you attempt to place a call while phone is locked. To answer a call with phone lock on, select Answer or the call key. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Phone lock. 52 S e t t i n g s 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 53. 3. Select one of the following options:
OnTurns on the phone lock feature after power on.
OffImmediately turns off the phone lock feature. If you selected On, you must enter your lock code and the lock code must be accepted before the phone will function normally. Allow numbers when phone locked When phone lock is on, the only outgoing calls that can be made are to the emergency number programed into your phone (for example, 911) and the number stored in the Allowed number when phone locked location. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Allowed number when phone locked. 2. Enter the lock code and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 53. 3. Enter the phone number; or select Search to recall the number from the phone book, and select OK. 4. Press the call key to press the call. Lock code When you change your lock code, make sure you store it in a safe place, away from your phone. Avoid entering access codes similar to emergency numbers such as 911 to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. The preset lock code is 1234. If you enter an incorrect lock code five times in a row, your phone will prompt you for the 5-digit, security code. If you enter the wrong lock code five times in succession, you will not be able to enter a code for 5 minutes, even if you power off the phone between incorrect entries 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change lock code. 2. Enter the current (or default) lock code, and select OK. 3. Enter the new lock code (must be 4 characters in length), and select OK. 4. Reenter the new lock code for verification, and select OK. 53 S e t t i n g s Voice privacy Voice privacy is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, the voice privacy feature protects the privacy of your current phone conversation from other callers placing phone calls on your same network. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Voice privacy >
On or Off. n Network The menu options you see in your phone are based on your service providers network. The network determines which options actually appear in the phone menu. Check with your service provider for more information. The Network menu allows you to customize the way your phone chooses a network in which to operate while you are within or outside of your primary or home system. Your phone is set to search for the most cost-effective network. If your phone cannot find a preferred network, it selects a network automatically based on the option you choose in the Network menu. Roaming options To set your phone to roam or search for another network when you are not in your home area, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Roaming options. 2. Select one of the following options:
Home onlyMake and receive calls in your home area only. AutomaticPhone automatically searches for service in another digital network. If one is not found, the phone uses analog service. The roaming rate applies when you are not in the home service area. 3. Select OK, if necessary, to confirm the activation. Mode You can choose whether your phone uses digital or analog service. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Mode, and one of the following service options:
54 S e t t i n g s Digital pref.The phone works in digital mode but will also work in analog mode when digital mode is unavailable. Digital onlyThe phone only works in digital mode. Analog onlyThe phone only works in analog mode. n Network services The following features are network services. See "Network services," p. 5. Store a feature code 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Network feature setting. 2. Enter the feature code from your service provider (for example, *633 Forward if busy), and select OK. 3. Select the type of forwarding that matches the feature code you entered (for example, Call forwarding). The activated feature code is now stored in your phone, and you are returned to the Feature code: field. Continue entering other feature codes (for example, *633), or press the end key to return to standby mode. Once you enter a network feature code successfully, the feature becomes visible in the Network services menu. Call forwarding Call forwarding tells your network to redirect incoming calls to another number. Call forwarding is a network service and may not work the same in all networks, so contact your wireless provider for availability. Activate 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding and select one of the following options:
Forward all calls Forward if busy Forward if not answered Forward if out of reach 55 S e t t i n g s Cancel all call forwarding 2. Select Activate. 3. Scroll to and select the destination to which your calls will be forwarded. 4. Enter the number to which your calls, data, or other information will be forwarded, and select OK. Call waiting If your wireless provider supports this feature, call waiting notifies you of an incoming call even while you are in a call. You can then accept, decline, or ignore the incoming call. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call waiting > Activate or Cancel. 2. During a call, select Answer or the call key to answer the waiting call. The first call is put on hold. 3. Press the end key to end the active call. Send own caller ID when calling If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can prevent your number from appearing on the receiving party caller ID. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Send my caller ID > Yes or No. Select your own phone number If your wireless service provider supports this feature, and you have more than one number, you can select the number to be used. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Own number selection. n Restore factory settings This option resets some of the menu settings to their original values. It does not delete data that you have entered or downloaded, or affect entries in your contacts list. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Restore factory settings. Enter the security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 53. 56 G a l l e r y 9. Gallery Pictures and ringing tones can be saved to folders in the Gallery, or to folders created of your own. Images and tones can be downloaded using web sites or Nokia PC Suite. n Open the gallery In the standby mode, select Menu > Gallery where you can View folders, Add folder, Delete folder, and Rename folder. n View folders 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Gallery > View folders > Images, Graphics, or Tones > Open. 2. Scroll to and select an image, graphic or tone, and Options > Open, Delete, Move, Rename, Set as ring tone or Set as wallpap., Details or Sort. 57 G a m e s 10. Games Challenge yourself or a friend to one of the fun games in your phone. Some menus listed are network services. Contact your wireless provider for more information. n Play a game In the standby mode, select Menu > Games > Select game. 1. 2. Scroll to a game, and select Options > Open or the call key. 3. Select one of the following options (if supported by the particular game):
New gameLaunch a new game. High scoresView the high scores for this game (if previously played). InstructionsView instructions for playing the game. Scroll down to read more. n Game settings 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Games. 2. Scroll to and select one of the following game submenus:
Select gameSelect a game or enter a game option list. See "Game details," p. 58. MemoryCheck the available memory for games and game-related applications. SettingsTurn Game sounds, Game lights, and Shakes on or off. n Game details To display the name, version, and size of a selected game, select Options >
Details. 58 V o i c e 11. Voice n Voice tag dialing You can dial up to 25 stored numbers using voice tag dialing. Before using voice tags, note that:
Voice tags are not language-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice.
You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it.
Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags ,and use them in a quiet environment.
Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Voice tags use may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. Assign a voice tag Before you use voice dialing, assign a voice tag to the number. 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to enter the contacts list. 2. Highlight the contact you want to assign a voice tag, select Details >
Options > Add voice tag > Start. 3. Speak clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone automatically stops recording, saves, and replays the voice tag. The icon is displayed next to commands that have voice tags assigned. If the recording is not successful, your phone displays Voice system error. Select Options > Add voice tag, and repeat Step 3. Dial a number 1. In the standby mode, select and hold Contacts. When you hear several beeps and Speak now is displayed, release Contacts. 59 V o i c e 2. Pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. When the phone finds the voice tag, Found: is displayed, and the phone automatically dials the number. If the phone does not locate a number or recognize the voice tag, No match found is displayed. Voice tags After you have associated a voice tag to a contact, in the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice tags > Options > Playback, Change, or Delete. n Voice commands Set as many as five voice commands, to allow hands-free operation of certain phone features. Assign a voice tag to a command Before using voice commands, you must first add a voice tag to the phone function. 1. 2. Select the phone function you wish to tag: Profiles, Voice mailbox, Voice In the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice commands. 3. recorder or Call log. If necessary, scroll to an option associated with that function, select Options > Add command. 4. Select Start, and speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone replays and saves the recorded tag. that have voice tags assigned. appears next to commands Activate a voice command After you have associated a voice tag with a phone function, you can issue a command by speaking the voice tag. 1. Select and hold Contacts. 2. When Speak now appears, pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. 60 V o i c e When the phone finds the voice tag, Found: is displayed, and the phone plays the recognized voice tag through the earpiece. The function you requested is activated. Options After you have associated a voice tag to a command, in the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice commands > Options > Playback, Change, or Delete. n Voice recorder This feature allows you to record speech or sound with your phone and listen to them later. The total available time is 30 seconds if no memos have been stored. The maximum length of a recording depends on how much memory remains available. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. Record speech or sound 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice recorder > Record. 2. After the recorder start tone is heard, begin recording speech or sound. 3. When you are finished recording, select Stop. 4. Enter the title for the recording, and select OK. Options After you have saved the recording to the Recordings list, highlight the recording, and select one of the following options: Playback, Delete, Edit title, and Alarm or Add alarm. 61 O r g a n i z e r 12. Organizer Your phone contains features to help organize your everyday life, including an alarm clock, calendar, calculator, countdown timer, and stopwatch. n Alarm clock In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time. Set an alarm The alarm clock is based on the phone clock. The alarm sounds an alert for any time you specify. 1. 2. Enter the time for the alarm (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you select 12-hour format). Alarm on is displayed briefly in the display, and standby mode. is displayed in the Change the time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time >
On. 2. Enter the time for the alarm (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you select 12-hour format). Alarm on is displayed briefly, and is displayed in the standby mode. Set the alarm tone You can set the tone to play when the alarm sounds. 1. 2. Highlight Standard, Ringing tone, or Open Gallery; and select a tone. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm tone. Alarm conditions When the alarm sounds, your phone beeps, vibrates (if vibrating alert is on for the currently active profile), and lights up the display. If you do not press a key, the alarm stops (snoozes) for 10 minutes, then sounds again. 62 O r g a n i z e r With the phone on, select Stop to shut the alarm off, or select Snooze. The alarm stops for 10 minutes and Snooze on is displayed. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop, the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Turn an alarm off In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time > Off. n Calendar The calendar tracks reminders, calls to make, meetings, and birthdays. It can even sound an alarm for any of these events. Monthly view provides an overview of the selected month and weeks. It also allows you to jump to a specific date. Any days or dates that appear in bold font contain calendar notes such as a meeting or reminder. Open In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. Move the cursor in some calendar views with the up and down scroll keys. Go to a date 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Go to date. 2. Enter the date (for example, mm/dd/yyyy), and select OK. Note a specific date You can choose from five types of notes: Meeting, Call, Birthday, Memo, and Reminder. Your phone asks for further information depending on which note you choose. You also have the option to set an alarm for any note that you select. 1. Go to the date for which you want to set a reminder. See "Go to a date," p. 63, in the previous section if you need more information. 63 O r g a n i z e r 2. From the monthly view (with the go to date highlighted), select Options >
Make a note, and one of the following note types:
MeetingEnter a subject, a location, and a start and end time. You can then set an alarm. CallEnter a phone number, a name, and the time. You can then set an alarm. BirthdayEnter the persons name, and year of birth. You can then set an alarm. MemoEnter a subject and an end date and set an alarm. ReminderEnter the subject you wish to be reminded about and set an alarm. 3. Enter your note, and select Options > Save. View notes (day view) To view the created calendar notes, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. 2. Scroll to the date that has a note. (Days with notes are in bold font.) 3. Select Options > View day. 4. To view a highlighted note, select Options > View. Send a note 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. 2. Scroll to the date containing the note. Any days containing notes are in bold font. 3. Select Options > View day. 4. Scroll to the note you wish to send, and select Options > Send note > Via 5. calendar or Via text msg. If you selected Via calendar, enter the number for the recipient or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. If you selected Via text msg., the note appears as a text message. 6. 7. Select Add number. 8. Enter the number for the recipient or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. 64 O r g a n i z e r 9. Select Options > Send. Receive notes When you receive a calendar note in calendar-to-calendar (vCal) format, Calendar note received is displayed. When you receive a calendar note as a text message, a message notification appears in the standby mode. You can then view, save, or discard the note and set an alarm for any date and time. n Calculator The calculator in your phone adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, calculates the square and the square root, changes the sign of the number entered, and converts currency values. Note: This calculator has a limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calculator. 2. Enter the first number in the calculation. Press # for a decimal point if necessary. Press * to cycle through the add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/) characters. Pause briefly to select the displayed character. 3. Enter the second number in your calculation. 4. Select Options (equals is highlighted). To perform a square or square root calculation, select Options > Square or Square root. To change the sign, select Options > Change sign, or scroll to the key. Currency converter You can convert foreign currency to domestic directly from the standby mode or from the Calculator menu. 1. In the standby mode, enter a currency amount to convert or select Menu >
Organizer > Calculator, and enter a currency amount to convert. 2. Select Options > To home or To foreign. To homeconverts foreign currency to domestic currency To foreignconverts domestic currency to foreign currency 65 O r g a n i z e r 3. Enter the exchange rate (press # to insert a decimal), and select OK. You can edit the exchange rate at any time. When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calculator > Options >
Exchange rate, and one of the following:
Foreign unit expressed in domestic unitsThe number of home units it takes to make one unit of foreign currency. Domestic unit expressed in foreign unitsThe number of foreign units it takes to make one unit of your home currency. 2. Enter the exchange rate, and select OK. n Countdown timer You can enter a specified countdown time (up to 99 hours and 59 minutes). When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm. The countdown timer only works when the phone is on. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer. Set the countdown timer 1. 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Enter a note for the timer, and select OK. The icon appears in the standby mode when the countdown timer is set. When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm, displays the timer note, and flashes its lights.
Press any key during the alarm to stop the timer.
After 30 seconds the timer alert expires automatically. Change the time After you have set the timer, you can change the time. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer > Set timer:. 2. Enter the new time, and select OK. 3. Leave the note as it was or enter a new note, and select OK. 66 O r g a n i z e r Stop the timer After you have set the timer, you can stop the timer at any time. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer > Stop timer. n Stopwatch Your phone has a stopwatch that can be used to track time. The stopwatch displays time in hours, minutes, seconds and fractions of a second in hh:mm:ss:s format. Using the stopwatch or allowing it to run in the background when using other features increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Measure time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Stopwatch > Split timing or Lap timing > Start. The running time is displayed on the screen. 2. Select Split to note the lapsed time. The timer continues to run. The split time appears below the running time. If you split the time more than once, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. Scroll to see previous measured times. 3. Select Lap to note the lap time. The clock stops, then starts immediately from zero. The lap time appears below the running time. If you take more than one lap time, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. When you select Stop, the total time appears at the top. 4. Select Stop to end the timing. The total time is displayed on the screen. 5. Select Options > Save to save the split or lap time. 6. Enter a name for the measurement, and select OK. If you do not enter a name, the total time is used as the default title for the time. Operation note If you press the end key and return to standby mode, the clock continues to run in the background and To return to the stopwatch screens:
appears in the upper left corner of the screen. 67 O r g a n i z e r In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Stopwatch >Continue. 1. 2. To stop the clock, select Stop. Options The following options are available with the stopwatch: Continue, Show last time, Split timing, Lap timing, View times, and Delete times. 68 13. PC Connectivity P C C o n n e c t i v i t y With the PC Suite you can, for example, create and send text messages, and synchronize contacts and calendar between your phone and a compatible PC. Some of the features available in PC Suite are carrier dependent. Check www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia Web site for the latest version of this guide, additional information, downloads, and services related to your Nokia product. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. n Nokia PC Suite Nokia PC Suite software is available for the Nokia 2126 phone. Nokia PC Suite is a collection of powerful tools that you can use to manage your device features and data. Each component is a separate program that includes online helps. Nokia PC Suite software, installation instructions, and other documentation, which are provided free of charge and can be downloaded from the software downloads of the Nokia Web site: www.nokiausa.com/pcsuite. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. n Your phone as a modem You can use your Nokia phone as a modem while connected to a compatible PC, giving you access to the Internet (for sending and receiving e-mail and Web browsing). To use your phone as a modem, install the modem software manually on your PC. The downloadable modem software is on the Nokia website at www.nokiausa.com/support/software/. Modem data service is a network-dependent feature. For availability and subscription to data services, contact your network operator or service provider. 69 E n h a n c e m e n t s 14. Enhancements Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-7 or ACP-12. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. A few practical rules about accessories and enhancements.
Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children.
When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Check regularly that enhancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly.
Installation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualified personnel only. Power
Standard 1070 mAh Li-Ion Battery (BL-6C)
Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7)
Travel Charger (ACP-12)
Mobile Charger (LCH-12)
Retractable Charger (AC-1) Audio
Headset (HS-5)
Boom Headset (HDB-4)
Loopset (LPS-4)
FM Radio Headset (HS-2R) 70 E n h a n c e m e n t s
Retractable Headset (HS-10) Data
Data Cable (DKU-5)
CA-43 Cable
Desk Stand with Sync (DCV-15) Car
Full Car Kit (CK-6)
Car Installation Kit (CARK-126)
Mobile Holder (MBC-17)
Mobile Lighter Charger (LCH-12)
Headrest Handsfree (BHF-1) 71 B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n 15. Battery information n Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. To prolong battery life of NiMh batteries, discharge the battery from time to time by leaving your device switched on until it turns itself off. Do not attempt to discharge the battery by any other means. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15C and 25C (59F and 77F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. 72 B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose batteries as household waste. n Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the packaging and inspect the hologram label using the following steps:
Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it and take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1.When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2.When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. 73 B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n 3.Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for example 12345678919876543210. Turn the battery so that the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokia.com/
batterycheck. What if your battery is not authentic?
If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery. 74 C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage.
Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it.
Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged.
Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics.
Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards.
Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide.
Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics.
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device.
Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation.
Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses).
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
Use chargers indoors.
Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes, before sending your device to a service facility. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. 75 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n Additional safety information n Operating environment Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 2.2 cm (7/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with a hearing aid should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. n Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cm
(6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should:
76 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n
Always keep the device more than 15.3 cm (6 in) from the pacemaker when the device is switched on.
Do not carry the device in a breast pocket.
Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move the device away. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. n Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. n Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel 77 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. n Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call:
1. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. phone for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. n Certification Information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards and guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of the public, regardless of age and health and to account for any variations in measurements. 78 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit set by ICNIRP is 2.2 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be well below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value when tested according to international testing procedures for use at the ear is 0.72 W/kg. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokiausa.com. USA and Canada: The SAR limit of USA (FCC) and Canada (IC) is 1.6 W/kg averaged over 1 gram of tissue. This device model has also been tested against this SAR limit. The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for use at the ear is 1.21 W/Kg and when properly worn on the body is 1.17 W/kg. Information about this device can be found on the FCC's website at http://
www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid by searching the equipment authorization system using FCC ID: QMNRH-71. n Technical information DimensionsWidth 49.9 mm (1.96 inches); length 108.3 mm (4.26 inches);
depth 23.2 mm (0.91 inches) Weight3.84 oz (108.8 g) with BL-6C Li-Ion Battery Volume5.95 cu in (97.5 cu cm) Frequency range (Tx)PCS 1851.251908.75 MHz;
Cellular 824.70848.37 MHz Frequency range (Rx)PCS 1931.251988.75 MHz;
Cellular 869.70893.37 MHz GPS Frequency1575.42 MHz n Battery information This section provides information about battery charging times with the Travel Charger (ACP-12) and the Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7), talk-times, and standby times. Be aware that the information in this section is subject to change. For more information, contact your service provider. 79 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n Charging times The following charging times are approximate with the BL-6C 1070 mAh Li-Ion battery:
Travel Charger (ACP-12): up to 1 hour 45 minutes Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7): up to 3 hours 45 minutes Talk and standby times Operation times are estimates only and depend on signal strength, phone use, network conditions, features used, battery age and condition (including charging habits), temperatures to which the battery is exposed, and many other factors. Talk time: up to 3.7 hours cellular and 4.1 hours PCS Standby time: up to 12 days n Patent information Manufactured or sold under one or more of the following US patents:
D405445 5491718 5758278 5887250 6025802 6088342 6377813 D406583 5596571 5790957 5887252 6029065 6148209 6414640 D414189 5642377 5793744 5889770 6047071 6154455 6434186 D405784 5699482 5796757 5929813 6055264 6167038 6459689 D423515 5701392 5802465 5990740 6072787 6205325 6463031 4969192 5708656 5821891 5991627 6076181 6253075 6466173 5440597 5737323 5854978 6005889 6078570 6292474 6480700 5444816 5754976 5859843 6009129 6084471 6332083 6480155 6486835 6496150 6570909 6580771 6587685 Others 4558302 4901307 5056109 5101501 5109390 5265119 RE32580 80 IndexNumerics1-touch dialing 27alarm clock 76antenna 13anykey answer 50applications 85automate voicemail 39automatic redial 51automatic update of service 51auto-update 57Bback coverremoving 14replacing 14, 17banner 58batteries and chargers 90batterycharging 14charging times 96removing 14replacing 14, 17talk and standby times 96battery information 96business cards 31Ccalculator 80calendar 77call duration 45call forwarding 66call log 43caller groups 26calling cards 52callsanswering 19in-call options 20making 18care and maintenance 91certification information (SAR) 94chargerconnecting 14information 90times 96color schemes 58contacts list 25add 25delete 29edit 28send 31view 30countdown timer 81currency converter 81customer care 7Ddata/fax calls 53dialing codes 39display language 54display settings 58downloadapplications 85Eemergency calls 94while using wireless Internet 75with keypad locked 55enhancement settings 59handsfree 59headset 59, 60music stand 61TTY/TDD 60enhancements 88ESN 7exchange rate 81FFCC information 94feature codes 65Ggallery 68games 69Hhandsfree 59headset 15, 59, 60help 7help text 12, 56Iindicators and icons 9KKeyguard 20automatic 54Llanguages 54loudspeaker 19Mmessage folders 40messagesdelete 41minibrowser messages 40picture messages 36text messages 32voice messages 38minibrowser 74minibrowser messages 40music stand 61NNetwork Services 6organizer 76Ppatent information 97phone settings 54picture messages 36predictive text 23profiles 48Qquick keys 9Rrestore factory settings 67restrict calls 61Ssafety 4important safety information 92screen saver 58scrolling 12security code 62, 63, 64security settings 61send own caller ID 67setdate 57time 56settings 50shared memory 7shortcuts 12start screen 9stopwatch 82Ttalk and standby times 96technical information 96text entry 22text messages 32time and date settings 56timed profiles 48tone settings 59, 64touch tones 55TTY/TDD 60turn phone off 15turn phone on 15Vviewcall duration 45call times 44data/ call duration 46dialed numbers 44minibrowser duration 46missed calls 43own phone number 67picture messages 37received calls 44saved messages 41voice 70voice commands 71voice dialing 70voice messages 38voice privacy 64voice recorder 72voicemail 38volumeadjusting 19using the loudspeaker 19Wwallpaper 58warranty 111welcome note 55wireless Internet 74make an emergency call 75receive a call while online 75sign on 74XXpress-on covers 16 81
| 1 | Manual 3 | Users Manual | 422.84 KiB | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 |
Nokia 2128i User Guide Issue 1 931169X26 1 LEGAL INFORMATION Part No.9240270, Issue No. 1 Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nokia 2128i, Xpress-on, Pop-Port, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Printed in Canada 2005 US Patent No. 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright 1999-2005. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 2128i product. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED AS IS. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, technology, or software subject to export laws and regulations from the U.S. and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. 2 Table of Contents T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s For your safety 41.Phone at a glance 92.Set up your phone 133.Text entry 214. Contacts list 245.Messages 316.Call log 427.Profiles 468.Settings 479.Gallery 6510.Games 6611.Voice 6712.Minibrowser 7013.Organizer 7314.Applications 8115.PC Connectivity 8216.Enhancements 8417.Battery information 86Care and maintenance 89Additional safety information 91 3 F o r y o u r s a f e t y For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the phone at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. 4 F o r y o u r s a f e t y WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your phone. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. n About your device The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the CDMA 800 and CDMA 1900 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. n Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilize network services. Your service provider may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured. This configuration may include 5 F o r y o u r s a f e t y changes in menu names, menu order and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. n Shared memory The following features in this device may share memory: contacts, TXT messages, images, and tones in Gallery, calendar notes, games, and applications. Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features sharing memory. Your phone may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. Some of the features, such as images, tones in Gallery, TXT messages, and applications may have a certain amount of memory specially allotted to them in addition to the memory shared with other features. 6 Welcome W e l c o m e Congratulations on your purchase of the Nokia 2128i mobile phone. Your phone provides many functions that are practical for daily use, such as a hands-free loudspeaker, alarm clock, calculator, calendar. Your phone can also connect to a PC, laptop, or other device using a data cable. To personalize your phone, you can set your favorite ring tones or select an Xpress-onTM color cover. n Get help Find your phone label If you need help, Nokia Customer Care is available for assistance. Before calling, we recommend that you write down the following information and have it available:
Electronic serial number (ESN)
Your zip code The ESN is found on the type label, which is located beneath the battery on the back of the phone. See "Remove the back cover," p. 15 and "Remove the battery," p. 15. Contact Nokia Please have your product with you when contacting either of the numbers below:
Nokia Customer Care Center, USA Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Boulevard, Suite #160 Tampa, Florida 33614 Tel: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Fax: 1-813-249-9619 TTY/TDD users: 1-800-24-NOKIA (1-800-246-6542) Customer Care Center, Canada Nokia Products Ltd. 601 Westney Road South 7 W e l c o m e Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 1-888-22-NOKIA (1-888-226-6542) Fax: 1-905-427-1070 Updates From time to time, Nokia updates this guide to reflect changes. The latest version and an interactive tutorial for this product may be available at the web site www.nokiausa.com. Accessibility solutions Nokia is committed to making mobile phones easy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities. For more information visit the web site at www.nokiaaccessibility.com. 8 1. Phone at a glance P h o n e a t a g l a n c e
Power key and flashlight
(1)
Earpiece (2)
Right selection key (3)
End key (4)
Keypad (5)
Connection port (6)
Microphone (7)
Charger port (8)
Scroll up and down key
(9)
Call key (10)
Left selection key (11)
Display screen (12) n The start screen Depending on your wireless service provider and the model number of your device, some or all of the following selection keys may appear on the start screen. 9 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e The start screen is home base and indicates that your phone is in the standby mode. Signal strength (1)A higher bar indicates a stronger network signal. Battery level (2)A higher bar indicates more charge in the battery. Menu (3)Press the left selection key to select this option. Contacts (4)Press the right selection key to select this option. n Quick keys In the standby mode, press the scroll down key to access the contacts list, and press the scroll up key to activate the flashlight. n Indicators and icons Depending on your wireless service provider and the model number of your phone, some or all of the following indicators and icons may appear in the standby mode:
You have new text or picture messages. See "TXT messages," p. 33. You have new voice messages. See "Automate voice mail," p. 38. Device keypad is locked. See "Keyguard," p. 21. Device is set to the silent profile. See "Profiles," p. 43. Alarm clock is set to on. See "Alarm clock," p. 65. Countdown timer is running. See "Countdown timer," p. 69. Stopwatch timer running in the background. See "Stopwatch," p. 70. Integrated hands-free is active. See "Use the loudspeaker," p. 20. Timed profile is selected. See "Profiles," p. 43. An enhancement is connected to the device. See "Enhancements," p. 73. or Voice privacy encryption is active in the network. See "Security settings," 54. 10 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e or Location info sharing is set to Emergency or On. See "Location information sharing," p. 44. Vibrating alert is active. See "Customize a profile," p. 43. You are roaming outside your home network. See "Roaming options," p. 57. You are in a 1XRTT network. See "Network services," p. 5. You are in a digital network. See "Network services," p. 5. You are in an analog network. See "Network services," p. 5. or Off hook, call or data call in progress. n Phone menus Phone features are grouped according to function and are accessed through the main menus. Each main menu contains submenus and lists from which you can select or view items and customize your phone features. To access these menus and submenus use the scroll method or use a shortcut. Some features may not be available, depending on your network. For more information, contact your wireless provider. The scroll method 1. In the standby mode, select Menu, and scroll up or down through the main menus. As you scroll through the menus, the menu number appears in the upper right corner of the display. Below the number is a scroll bar with a tab that moves up or down on the right side of the display screen as you scroll through the menus. This display provides a visual representation of your current position in the menu structure. 2. When you arrive at a menu, press the left selection key to enter submenus or, when the browser appears on the display, select Connect to enter that menu.
Select Back (the right selection key) to return to the previous menu.
Select the end key from any submenu or select Exit from the main menu level to return to the standby mode. 11 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e Shortcuts To go directly to almost any menu or submenu, as well as activate most features use a shortcut. In the standby mode, select Menu; then within 3 seconds, press the key or keys associated with the menu function you would like to view or activate. For example, to select the meeting profile, select Menu 3-3-1 from standby mode
(Menu > 3 Profiles > 3 Meeting > 1 Activate). After a brief pause, the Meeting profile is activated. In-phone help Many features have brief descriptions (help text) that can be viewed on the display. In order to view the descriptions, you must first activate help text. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off. n To view these descriptions, scroll to a feature, and wait for about 15 seconds. Select More, when necessary, to view all of the description, or select Back to exit. n Security feature The security feature protects your device from unauthorized outgoing calls or access to the stored information with the lock and security codes. The lock code is a four-digit number while the security code is a five-digit number. By default, the security feature uses the lock code (defaulted to the last four digits of your phone number) instead of the security code to protect your phone. Enter the lock code to access the following security option:
In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings. 1. 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. Note: Depending on your wireless service provider, the preset lock code may be 1234 or 0000 instead of the last four digits of your phone number. If these codes do not work, contact your wireless service provider for help. Your device, by default, requires you to enter the lock code to restore factory settings:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Restore factory settings. 12 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. Note: Depending on your wireless service provider, your device may ask you for the security code (defaulted to 12345) instead of the lock code. 13 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 2. Set up your phone n Antenna Your phone has an internal antenna that is located toward the top of the phone. In the Nokia 2128i phone, the GPS antenna is internal and is activated when you place emergency calls or when Location on is selected from the Location info sharing menu. See "Location information sharing," p. 44. Hold the phone as you would any other telephone with the antenna area pointed up and over your shoulder. Note: As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the device is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna while operating the device optimizes the antenna performance and the battery life. n Change the battery Always switch the device off, and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. 14 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the AC-1, ACP-7 and ACP-12 chargers. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Note: Always switch off the power and disconnect the charger and any other device before removing the cover. Avoid touching electronic components while changing the cover. Always store and use the device with the cover attached. Remove the back cover 1. With the back of the phone facing you, push down on the back cover release button. 2. Slide the back cover toward the bottom of the phone and remove. Remove the battery After you have removed the back cover, insert your finger into the finger grip, and lift the battery from its compartment. 15 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Replace the battery 1. Position the battery so the positive and negative indicators on the battery match up with the positive and negative indicators on the phone. The battery label should face away from the phone. 2. Insert the battery, gold-colored contact end first, into the battery slot. 3. Push down on the other end of the battery to snap it into place. Replace the back cover Slide the back cover toward the top of the phone until the back cover is securely in place. Charge the battery 1. Plug the charger into a standard ac outlet. 2. Insert the charger output plug into the round jack at the bottom end of the phone. After a few seconds, the battery indicator on the display starts to scroll from bottom to top. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. 16 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e n Turn your phone on or off 1. To turn your phone on or off, press and hold the power key on top of the phone for at least 3 seconds. 2. Enter the lock code. if necessary, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. n Connect the headset A compatible headset, such as HS-5, may be purchased with your phone or separately as an enhancement. See "Enhancements," p. 73. Important: The headset may affect your ability to hear sounds around you. Do not use this headset in situations that may endanger your safety. Warning: When using the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. 1. Plug the headset connector into the Pop-Port connector at the bottom end of your phone. appears in the standby mode. 2. Position the headset on your ear. With the headset connected, make, answer, and end calls as usual.
Use the keypad to enter numbers.
Press the call key to place a call.
Press the end key to end a call. n Change the Xpress-on covers Note: Always switch off the power, and disconnect the charger and any other device, Before removing the cover. Do not touch electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the device with the covers attached. 17 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e To change the Xpress-on covers, first remove the back cover and battery. Remove the front cover Gently pull the bottom of the front cover away from the rest of the phone. Install the keymat and front cover 1. Remove the keymat from the old front cover. 2. Place the keymat into the new front cover. 18 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 3. Press the front cover and keymat against the phone, and snap the front cover into place. 4. Replace the battery and back cover. n Make a call Use the keypad 1. Enter the phone number (including the area code), and press the call key. To delete a character to the left of the cursor, select Clear. 2. Press the end key to end the call, or select End call to cancel the call attempt. Use the contacts list 1. 2. Press the call key to make the call, or select Details to view details of the In the standby mode, scroll down to the entry you wish to view. entry. Use the last dialed number 1. In the standby mode, press the call key to display the last 20 numbers dialed. 2. Scroll to the number (or name) you wish to redial, and press the call key. Conference calls Conference calling is a network service that allows you to take part in a conference call with two other participants. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. With the first participant on the line, select Options > New call. 3. Enter the phone number of the second participant, or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list. 4. Select Flash and the first participant is put on hold. 19 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 5. When the second participant answers, press the call key to connect the calls. 6. To end the conference call, press the end key. n Answer calls Answer, silence, or decline an incoming call Silence and Decline are carrier dependent features. 1. Press the call or Answer key to answer the call. 2. To mute the ringing tone, select Silence. If you do not answer the call, the call is forwarded to voicemail. 3. To dismiss and forward the call to voicemail (a carrier dependent feature), select Decline after you have muted the ringing tone, or press the end key at any time. Answer a call with the keypad locked To answer a call with the keypad locked, press the call key. During the call, all features function normally. When you end, silence or decline the call, the keypad automatically relocks. See "Keyguard," p. 21. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. Adjust the earpiece volume While in a call, scroll up or down to adjust the volume of the earpiece. When you adjust the volume, a bar chart appears in the display to indicate the volume level. Use the loudspeaker You can use your phone as a loudspeaker during a call.
To activate the loudspeaker, select Loudspeaker.
To deactivate the loudspeaker during a call, select Handset. The loudspeaker is deactivated automatically when a call (or a call attempt) ends, or when certain enhancements are connected. 20 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Options during a call Many of the options that used during a call are network services. Check with your wireless service provider for more information. 1. Select Options to display the following:
Mute or UnmuteSilence your end of the call. Loudsp. or HandsetActivate or deactivate the loudspeaker while in a call. New callInitiate a conference call. See "Conference calls," p. 19. SaveSave the number you entered during a call. Add to contactSave the number you entered during a call to a contact that is already in the contacts list. End all callsDisconnect from all active calls. Touch tonesEnter the numbers, and select Tones to send the numbers as tones. ContactsView the contacts list. MenuView the phone menu. 2. Scroll to and select an option to activate the option or enter its submenu. n Keyguard Use keyguard, to lock the keypad and prevent keys from being pressed accidentally. Remember to lock your phone keypad to prevent accidental calls. If the keypad is locked, it unlocks when you receive a call. After the call, the lock automatically reactivates. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your phone. Enter the emergency number and press the call key. See "Automatic keyguard," p. 47. Lock the keypad Select Menu; then press * within 2 seconds. 21 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Unlock the keypad Select Unlock; then press * within 2 seconds. 22 3. Text entry T e x t e n t r y You can use two methods for entering text and numbers: standard mode and predictive text mode.
Select Clear to backspace the cursor and delete a character.
Select and hold Clear to backspace continuously and delete characters. n Standard mode Standard mode is the only way to enter text into the contacts list and to rename caller groups. Text (Abc) Press a key once to insert the first letter on the key and twice for the second letter, etc. If you pause briefly, the last letter in the display is accepted and your device awaits the next entry.
Press 0 to enter a space and accept a completed word.
Press 1 to insert a period into your message.
Press and hold * to display a complete list of special characters.
Press and hold # to switch between letters and numbers. Numbers (123) To switch from Abc mode to 123 mode, press and hold # at any message entry screen. Punctuation and special characters While at any text entry screen, press * to display special characters (press and hold * if predictive text is on). Press * again to cycle through all available characters. To navigate through the list of special characters, use the scroll keys. Once a character is highlighted, select Insert to insert the character into your message. 23 T e x t e n t r y n Predictive text mode To write messages quickly, use predictive text mode with your keypad and the built-in dictionary. Predictive text mode is much faster than the standard mode method because you do not need to scroll through the letters on each key to spell a word. The dictionary determines which word to enter based on the keys selected. Activate or deactivate At any text entry screen, select Options > Predictive text > English, Franais, or Espaol to activate predictive text; or select Prediction off to deactivate predictive text. Text entry The illustration below simulates your display each time a key is pressed. For example, to write Nokia with predictive text on and the English dictionary selected, press each of the following keys:
4 6 5 2 6
Press 0 to enter a space, and begin writing the next word.
If a displayed word is not correct, press * to see other matches. To return to the previous word in the list of matches, select Previous.
If ? appears after a word, select Spell to enter the word with the standard mode, and add the word to the dictionary.
Press 1 to insert a period into your message.
Press and hold * to display special characters. Press * again to cycle through all available characters. n Change case and mode Press # to switch between uppercase, lowercase, and sentence case text; and between standard and predictive text mode. Case and mode are indicated by the icons that appear in the upper left of the display screen, as follows:
Uppercase text: standard mode is on. 24 T e x t e n t r y Lowercase text: standard mode is on. Sentence case text: standard mode is on. This option is available only at the beginning of a sentence. Uppercase text: predictive text is on. Lowercase text: predictive text is on. Sentence case text: predictive text is on. This option is available only at the beginning of a sentence. 25 C o n t a c t s l i s t 4. Contacts list The contacts list can hold up to 500 contacts with multiple numbers and text notes for each contact. The amount of numbers and text entries that you can save may vary, depending on length and the total number of entries in the contacts list. n Search In the standby mode, select Contacts > Search; highlight the contact you wish to view, and select Details. n Add new contacts In the standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save. Save a name and number 1. 2. Select Options > Save. 3. Enter the contact name, and select OK. Save (only) a number In the standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save; select and hold Options. Save multiple numbers and text items The first number you save for any entry is automatically set as the default. The default setting can be changed later. To save different types of phone numbers and short text items per name to the phone memory, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display a list of entries. Scroll to the entry to which to add a phone number or text item. 2. Select Details > Options > Add number or Add detail. 3. Enter the number or text for the type you have selected, and select OK. 4. To change the type (E-mail, Web address, Street addr.), select Change type in the options list. 26 C o n t a c t s l i s t To change which phone number is the default number for the contact entry:
1. In the standby mode, scroll down to the entry you wish to change, and select Details. 2. Scroll to the number you wish to set as default, select Options > As primary no. Set up voice tags For more information on setting up voice tags and other voice features, see
"Voice tags," p. 63. Caller groups You can add contact list entries to any of five caller groups, and assign a unique ringing tone or graphic to that group. This enables you to identify callers from the group by their unique ringing tone or graphic. Set up a caller group 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display a list of entries in your contacts list. 2. Scroll to a name to add to a caller group, and select Details. 3. Select Options > Caller groups. 4. Scroll to and select the caller group to add the name. Options 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Caller groups > Family, VIP, Friends, Business, and Other. 2. Select from following caller group options:
Rename groupRename the group to your preference. Group ringing toneSet the ringing tone for the group. Group logoTurn the graphic for the caller group on or off or view the graphic. Group membersAdd or remove members from the caller group. 27 C o n t a c t s l i s t Set up 1-touch dialing You can associate any entry in the contacts list with a key from 29; then dial those entries by pressing and holding the assigned key. See "1-touch dialing," p. 45 to activate or deactivate 1-touch dialing. Assign a key to 1-touch dialing 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. If 1-touch dialing is off, the phone displays a prompt asking if you would like to turn 1-touch dialing on. Select Yes to activate 1-touch dialing 2. Scroll to an (empty) 1-touch dialing slot, and select Assign. 3. Enter the number (including the area code) and a name for the contact, or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list. 4. Select OK. Change 1-touch dialing numbers 1. 2. Scroll to the 1-touch dialing entry you wish to change, and select Options >
In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. Change. 3. Enter the new number; or search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. 4. Enter a name for the entry, and select OK. Delete 1-touch dialing numbers 1. 2. Scroll to the 1-touch dialing location you wish to delete, and select Options >
In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. Delete > OK. In the standby mode, scroll down to display your contacts list. n Edit contacts list entries 1. 2. Scroll to the entry to edit; select Details and one of the following options:
Add voice tag or Voice tagAdd a new voice tag or Playback, Change, or Delete an existing voice tag. Edit numberEdit an existing contact number. Delete numberDelete a phone number from the contact. 28 C o n t a c t s l i s t Use numberDisplay the phone number in the standby mode, ready to be called. ViewView the details of the contact. Change typeChange the number type to General, Mobile, Home, Work, or Fax or the detail type to E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note As primary no.Change the default number of the contact. Add numberAdd a number to the contact. Add detailAdd an address or note to the contact. Caller groupsAdd the contact to an existing caller group. Custom toneAdd a custom ringing tone to the contact. Send bus. cardSend the contact as a business card to another phone. Send messageCreate and send a message to the contact. 1-touch dialingAdd the contact to your speed dial list. Edit nameEdit the name of the contact. View nameView the name of the contact. DeleteDelete the entire contact entry from your contacts list. Edit phone number Highlight the phone number to edit, and select Options. E-mail address entry Highlight the e-mail address entry to send or update, and select Options and one of the following:
Send e-mailSend an e-mail. Edit detailEdit e-mail details. Delete detailDelete e-mail. ViewView the details of the e-mail contact. Change typeChange the e-mail type to E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note. Add detailAdd an E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note to the entry. Add numberAdd a number to the entry. 29 C o n t a c t s l i s t Caller groupsAdd the e-mail to an existing caller group. Custom toneAdd a custom ringing tone to the contact. Send bus. cardSend the contact a business card. Edit nameEdit the name of the contact. View nameView the name of the contact. DeleteDelete the entire e-mail entry from your contacts list. Edit web address 1. Highlight the web address entry to edit, and select Options. 2. Select Web address, Street addr., or Note > OK. n Delete contacts list entries In the standby mode, select Contacts > Delete.
To delete individual entries, select One by one, and scroll to the entry you wish to delete. Select Delete > OK to confirm.
To delete the entire contents of your contacts list, select Delete all > OK. Select OK to confirm or Back to return to Contacts. If OK, enter the security code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. n View the contacts list 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts and one of the following options:
SearchFind a name or select from a list. Add newAdd a contact to your contacts list. Edit nameEdit an existing name. DeleteDelete a name and its associated numbers. Add numberAdd a number to an existing name. SettingsChange the contacts list view, check the memory status of your phone. 1-touch dialingView or modify the list of 1-touch dialing numbers. Voice tagsAttach, listen to, or modify a contact voice tag. Own numberView your own phone number. 30 C o n t a c t s l i s t Caller groupsView and edit the properties for any of the caller groups:
Family, VIP, Friends, Business, or Other. 2. Scroll to and select an item to activate the feature or enter its submenu. Fast search for a name 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display the contents of your contacts list. 2. Press the key that corresponds to the first letter of the name for which you are performing a search. 3. Scroll up and down to highlight a contact, and select Details to view the details. Configure settings You can choose how the contacts appear in your contacts list and view the amount of memory used or available in your phone. For more information on used and available memory, see "Shared memory," p. 6. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Settings, and one of the following options:
Scrolling viewChoose how names and numbers stored in the contacts list are viewed. Select Name list or Name and no. Memory statusView the amount of memory used in phone book. n Send and receive contacts To send and receive an entry in your contacts list, use text messaging, if supported by your wireless provider. Send a business card To send a business card as a TXT message to a compatible phone or other handheld device, do the following:
1. Highlight the entry from the contacts list and select Details > Options > Send bus. card > Via text msg., and one of the following:
Select Primary no. or All details, if the entry has more than one number or detail.
Enter the number for your recipient. 31 C o n t a c t s l i s t
Select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts list. 2. Select OK , to send the business card. 32 5. Messages M e s s a g e s If you have subscribed to a messaging service through your wireless provider, you can send and receive TXT messages to compatible phones that also subscribe to a compatible message service. You may also be able to send and receive picture messages and e-mail messages. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the 160 character limit for a single message. Longer messages will be sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options like Chinese, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. The number of characters remaining in a message are indicated by counter in upper right corner of screen. If there are special characters in your message, the indicator may not show the message length correctly. Note: When sending messages, your device may display Message sent. This is an indication that the message has been sent by your device to the message center number programed into your device. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. n TXT messages Write and send 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message, and one of the following:
Text (select to send an alphanumeric TXT message) > Add number, Add e-
mail, Edit message, List recipients, or Send.
Numeric page (select to send a numeric message) > Add number, Callback no., List recipients, or Send. 2. Select Add number or Add e-mail to enter the recipients phone number or e-mail address; or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts list. Select OK. 33 M e s s a g e s 3. Repeat step 2 to add more recipients, and select OK. 4. Select Options > Edit message. 5. Compose a message and select Options > Send. Messaging options When you create or reply to a TXT message, depending on the mode of text input you use and the features supported by your wireless service provider, some or all of the following options are available:
SendSend the message to recipient. List recipientsSend the message to more than one recipient; or delete or edit the recipient list. Save messageSave the message to a folder. Select Sent items, Templates, and Archive. Clear textErase the text clipboard. Exit editorSave the message to your Sent items folder automatically, and exit the message editor. Insert contactInsert a name from your contacts list into your message. Insert numberInsert a phone number or find a phone number in the contacts list, to insert into your message. Use templateInsert a predefined template into your message. Insert smileyInsert a smiley into your message Note: If a picture is inserted, you will be given the additional options to Preview, Change picture, and Delete picture. A picture message cannot be sent to an e-mail address. Insert word or Edit wordEnter or edit the text of a new word that might not appear in the predictive text dictionary. This displays only when the Predictive text is on. Insert symbolInsert a special character into your message. This displays only when the Predictive text is on. Predictive textChoose a predictive text language, and turn the dictionary on or off. MatchesView matches found in the dictionary for the word you want to use. 34 M e s s a g e s Distribution list The distribution list allows you to send messages to a group of contacts. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Distribution lists. To create a distribution list, select Options > Add list. To populate your list, select Add contact and a contact from your contacts list. To view, rename or modify a distribution list, highlight the distribution list, and select Options > View list, Rename list, Clear list, or Delete list. Templates Templates are short, prewritten messages that can be recalled and inserted into new TXT messages. 1. Open the blank message creation screen. See "Write and send," p. 33. 2. Select Options > Use template. 3. Scroll to and select one of the available templates. 4. Enter the text into your new message, and select Options > Send. Read messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. are displayed in When you receive a TXT message, a notification message and the upper left corner in the standby mode. When you have unopened messages in your Inbox, 1. Select Show to read the message or Exit to remove the notification icon. is displayed. Scroll to view the whole message, if necessary. 2. Select Options > Reply. 3. Select Empty screen, and compose your reply. 4. To send your reply, select Options > Send. Options When you read a TXT message, some or all of the following options are available, depending on the text input mode and the features supported by your wireless service provider:
DeleteDiscard the message. 35 M e s s a g e s ReplyReply to the message. Create the message, and select Options >Send. Use numberChoose Save, Add to contact, Send message, or Call. SaveSave the message to a folder. Use web linkActivate web link (appears when message contains a URL). Save addressSave e-mail address (appears when the message contains an e-
mail address). List objectsDisplay a selection list that includes sounds, pictures, animations, vCard, and vCalendar objects embedded in message. ForwardForward the message to another phone number. RenameEdit the title of the message. n Message folders Save messages To save drafts of messages or received messages to a folder, do the following:
1. Open the message or create a new message, and select Options. 2. Select Save or Save message > Sent items, Templates, Archive, or a folder you created. View saved messages 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages. 2. Select the folder containing the message you wish to view:
InboxStores read and unread messages. Sent itemsStores messages sent automatically from your phone. ArchiveStores messages you have saved. TemplatesStores pictures and prewritten templates. My foldersProvides a place to organize your messages in custom folders. Select Options > Add folder or Options > Rename folder or Delete folder to change a folder. 3. Once the folder opens, scroll to and select the message to view. 36 M e s s a g e s n Delete messages If your message memory is full, Message overwriting is set to off and you have more messages waiting at the network, when No space for new messages appears in the standby mode:
Read some of the messages, and delete them.
Delete messages from your folders. Delete a single message 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages. 2. Scroll to and select the message to delete. 3. Select Options > Delete > OK. Select Back to exit Delete all messages in a folder 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Delete messages. 2. Scroll to the folder containing the messages to delete, and Select one of the following options:
AllDeletes all messages in all folders All readDeletes any messages which have been read in all folders All unreadDeletes any messages which have not been read in all folders InboxDeletes all messages from the Inbox folder Sent itemsDeletes all messages from the Sent items folder ArchiveDeletes all messages from the Archive folder and all user created folders User defined foldersDisplays all user defined folders that the user added under My folders after the predefined folders. 3. Select OK to empty the folder. 37 M e s s a g e s Delete folders Only folders created in My folders can be deleted. The Inbox, Sent items, Archive, and Templates folders are protected. When a folder is deleted, all messages in the folder are also deleted. n Message settings Change sending options Note: Some or all of the following Sending options may be available as determined by your carrier. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Message settings > Sending options, and select the setting you wish to change.
PrioritySets the priority of the note to Normal or Urgent.
Delivery noteReceives a note confirming delivery of the message. Select On or Off.
Send callback numberSends a callback number to the recipient. Select Off or enter your phone number. Change message settings In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Message settings > Other settings, and one of the following options:
Message font sizeSelect Small font or Large font. Message overwritingSelect Sent items only, Inbox only, S. items & inbox, or Off. Save to Sent i-tems as sendingSelect Always save, Always prompt, or Off. When the message memory is full, your phone cannot send or receive any new messages. However, you can set your phone to automatically overwrite selected messages in the Inbox or Sent items folders when new messages arrive. n Automate voice mail Special characters, called dialing codes, can be added to phone numbers. Dialing codes instruct the receiving system to pause, wait, bypass, or accept the numbers that follow them in the dialing string. See "Insert dialing codes," p. 39. 38 M e s s a g e s Voice mail services vary by service provider. The following instructions are examples of common operations. Please check with your service provider for specific instructions for using your voice mail service. Set up voice mail with dialing codes 1. Write down your voice mailbox number. 2. Call and check your voice mail as you normally would. 3. Write down your interaction with the recorded prompts step-by-step. Keep in mind that each voice mail service may vary. However, it should be similar to the following:
Dial *86, pause 5 seconds, enter password (such as, 1234), press #. In the standby mode, select Contacts > 1-touch dialing. 4. 5. Scroll to an (empty) 1-touch dialing slot and select Assign. 6. Enter your voice mailbox number, including the area code. 7. Enter any dialing codes as necessary using the information that you wrote down from "Insert dialing codes," p. 39. If you pause for 5 seconds after connecting to voice mail, enter p twice after the voice mailbox number; for example, 2145551212pp. 8. Enter any remaining pauses or other information that allows you to listen to your messages, and select OK. 9. Enter a name (such as voice mail), and select OK. To dial and listen to your voice mail, in the standby mode, press and hold the assigned 1-touch dialing key. Insert dialing codes Press * repeatedly to cycle through the dialing codes. Once the desired code appears in the display, pause briefly. The code is inserted into the dialing string. The following dialing codes are available:
* Bypasses a set of instructions
+ International prefix p Pauses for 2.5 seconds before sending the numbers that follow 39 M e s s a g e s w Waits for you to press the call key before sending the numbers or codes that follow 40 6. Call log C a l l l o g Call log stores information about the last 20 missed, 20 received, and 20 dialed calls. It also stores the duration of all calls. When the number of calls exceeds the maximum, the most recent call replaces the oldest. To view information for Missed calls, Received calls, or Dialed numbers, choose from the following options:
Call timeDisplays the date and time of the call Send messageSends a message to the number View numberDisplays the number Use numberEdits the number and associates a name with the number SaveEnters a name for the number and saves it to your contacts list Add to contactAdds the number to an existing entry in your contacts list, if the number is not associated with a name DeleteClears the number from memory CallCalls the number n View missed calls Missed calls were never answered. The missed calls feature does not function when your phone is switched off. If the message icon appears in the display, select List and highlight the missed call. Select Options. Or, from the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Missed calls . Highlight a missed call and select Options. n View received calls Received calls have been answered. In the standby mode, select Menu > Call log
> Received calls. Highlight a received call and select Options. n View dialed numbers Dialed numbers were dialed previously from your phone. In the standby mode, press the call key, or select Menu > Call log > Dialed numbers. Highlight a name or number and select Options. 41 C a l l l o g Call times To view up to five calls with the time each call occurred, your phone clock must be set. 1. Select Options > Call time. 2. Scroll through the calls to view the recent call times. 3. Select Back to return to the options list. n Delete call logs To delete any missed, dialed, or received calls from phone memory, in the standby mode, select Menu > Call log > Delete recent call lists and select the call type to clear: All, Missed, Received or Dialed. n View duration of calls Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. To activate the call timer, in the standby mode and while in a call, select Details >
Show call time on display > On or Off. Note: Some timers, including the life timer, may be reset during service or software upgrades. To determine the duration of your calls, select Menu > Call log > Call timers, and Duration of last call, Duration of dialed calls (Home or Roaming), Duration of received calls (Home or Roaming), Duration of all calls, Life timer, Clear timers Clear timers sets all call timers, except the life timer, to zero. Enter your security code, and OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. 42 7. Profiles P r o f i l e s Profiles define how your phone reacts when you receive a call or message, how your keypad sounds when you press a key, and more. Ringing options, keypad tones, and other settings for each profile can be left at their default setting, or customized. The following profiles are available: Normal, Silent, Meeting, Outdoor, and Pager. Profiles are also available for enhancements such as a headset and car kit. See
"Enhancement settings," p. 52, for more information about enhancement profiles. n Activate In the standby mode, select Menu > Profiles > select the profile of your choice >
Activate. In the standby mode, select Menu > Profiles. n Customize a profile You can customize the profiles in a variety of ways. You cannot rename the Normal profile. 1. 2. Highlight the profile you wish to customize and select Customize. 3. Select the option you want to customize: Incoming call alert, Ringing tone, Ringing volume, Vibrating alert, Message alert tone, Keypad tones, Warning tones, Alert for, or Profile name. n Set a timed profile Timed profiles can prevent missed calls. For example, if you attend an event that requires your phone to be Silent, but you may forget to return it to Normal. A timed profile returns your phone to the default profile at the time you specify. Timed profiles can be set up to 24 hours in advance. 1. 2. Select the profile to activate and select Timed for timed expiration. 3. Enter the time for the profile to expire, and select OK. In the standby mode, select Menu > Profiles. 43 S e t t i n g s 8. Settings Use this menu to change the time settings, call settings, phone settings, display settings, tone settings, enhancement settings, security settings, network, network services, and to restore the factory settings. n Call settings Location information sharing Location information sharing is a network service and must be supported by your wireless service provider. See "Network services," p. 5, for more information. Location info sharing allows the phone to share position information over the network. For calls to emergency numbers, this position information may be used by the emergency operator to determine the location of the phone. The functionality and accuracy of this feature is dependent on the network, satellite systems, and the agency that receives the information. It may not function in all areas or at all times. Location information is always shared with the network during emergency calls to the official emergency number programed into the phone, regardless of which setting is selected. After you place an emergency call the phone remains in emergency mode for five minutes. During this time, the location information is shared with the network. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Location info sharing > 911 only or Location on > OK > OK. 911 onlyThis is the default profile. The phone location information is shared only during an emergency call to the official emergency number programed into your phone. The phone screen displays in the upper left hand corner when in the standby mode. Location onThe phone location information is shared with the network whenever the phone is powered on and activated. The screen displays the upper left-hand corner when in the standby mode. in Anykey answer Anykey answer allows you to answer an incoming call with a brief press of any key except the power, right selection, or end key. 44 S e t t i n g s In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Anykey answer >
On or Off. Automatic redial Occasionally, your network may experience heavy traffic, which results in a fast busy signal when you dial. With automatic redial activated, your phone redials the number (number of times is specified by the network), and notifies you once the network is available. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Automatic redial >
On or Off. 1-touch dialing To activate or deactivate 1-touch dialing. In the standby mode, select Menu >
Settings > Call settings > 1-touch dialing > On or Off. See "Set up 1-touch dialing," p. 28. Automatic update of service Your phone can receive updates to wireless services sent to your phone by your service provider. This option is a network service. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Auto-update of service > On or Off. Calling cards If you use a calling card for long distance calls, save the calling card number in your phone. The phone can store up to four calling cards. Contact your calling card company for more information. Save information 1. 2. Enter your security code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. 3. Scroll to one of the four card memory locations, and select Options > Edit >
In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Calling card. Dialing sequence. 4. Select one of the following sequence types:
Access no. + phone no. + card no.Dial the 1-800 access number, phone number, then enter the card number (plus PIN if required). 45 S e t t i n g s Access no. + card no. + phone no.Dial the 1-800 access number, card number (plus PIN if required), then enter the phone number. Prefix + phone no. + card no.Dial the prefix (numbers that must precede the phone number) and phone number, then enter the card number (plus PIN if required). 5. Enter the required information (access number or prefix and card number), and select OK to confirm your entries. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Calling card. 6. Select Card name > enter the card name > OK. Make calls After you have saved your calling card information in your phone, make a call with your calling card. 1. 2. Enter your security code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. 3. Scroll to the calling card of your choice, select Options > Select > OK. 4. Press the end key to return to the standby mode and enter the phone number, including any prefix (such as 0 or 1) that your calling card may require when you make a calling card call. See your calling card for instructions. 5. Press and hold the call key for a few seconds until Card call is displayed. 6. When you hear the tone or system message, select OK. International prefix To store an international dialing prefix into your phone, enter + at the beginning of a phone number. Your phone automatically inserts the international dialing prefix that you stored. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > International prefix. 2. Enter the international dialing prefix (for example, 0011), and select OK. 3. In the standby mode, enter + (press * key twice) and the phone number to call
(for example, +3546789). The phone calls the international dialing prefix you have stored in your phone and the phone number you have entered (for example, the phone calls 0011354789). 46 S e t t i n g s Call summary Your phone can display the time spent on a call when you hang up. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Call summary > On or Off. n Phone settings Phone language In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Phone language, and select the language: English or Espaol. The phone language you choose affects the time and date formats of the clock, alarm clock, and calendar. Automatic keyguard To set the keypad of your phone to lock automatically after a preset time delay
(from 10 seconds to 60 minutes), do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Automatic keyguard > On or Off. If you select On, Set delay: is displayed. 2. 3. Enter the delay (in minutes and seconds), and select OK. Important: When keyguard is on, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into your phone. Enter the emergency number, and press the call key. The number is displayed only after you enter the last digit. Touch tones Touch tones sound when you press the keys on your phone keypad. You can use touch tones for many automated dial-up services such as banking and airlines, or for entering your voice mailbox number and password. Touch tones are sent during an active call and can be sent manually from your phone keypad, or sent automatically by saving them in your phone. Set type 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Touch tones
> Manual touch tones. 47 S e t t i n g s 2. Select one of the following options:
ContinuousSets tone sounds for as long as you press and hold a key FixedSends tones of the duration you specify in the Touch tone length option OffTurns off tones. No tones are sent when you press a key. Set length To specify touch tone length when using the Fixed option, in the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Touch tones > Touch tone length >
Short (0.1 seconds) or Long (0.5 seconds). Welcome note You can write a welcome note that briefly appears on the display screen whenever you switch your phone on. Predictive text input is not available for entering welcome note text 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note. 2. Enter a note (up to 44 characters). Press * to display and select from the available special characters. 3. When you are finished, select Options > Save to save the welcome note or Delete to delete the previous text and create another welcome note. Help text Your phone displays brief descriptions for most menu items. These descriptions are called help text. The default setting for help text is On. To turn help text on or off, in the standby mode, select Menu >Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off. When Help text activation is turned On, select a feature or menu, pause for 10 to 15 seconds, and wait for the help text to display. Use the scroll keys in view the complete help text, if necessary. 48 S e t t i n g s n Time and date settings Time Show or hide the clock In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Show clock or Hide clock. Set the time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Set the time. 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm if your selected12-hour format. Change the format In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Time format > 24-hour or 12-hour. Date Show or hide the date In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date > Show date or Hide date. Set the date 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date > Set the date. 2. Enter the date, and select OK. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date. Change the date format 1. 2. Scroll to Date format, and select a format. 3. Scroll to and select the Date separator. 4. Select a separator. Set the auto-update of date and time Auto-update is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. 49 S e t t i n g s If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can allow the digital network to set the clock, which is useful when you are out of your home area, or when you have traveled to another network or time zone. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Auto-update of date & time > On, Confirm first, or Off. If you use the Auto-update of date & time option while outside your digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually. Network time will replace the time and date when you re-enter your digital network. If your battery has been removed or has drained outside the digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually (once the battery is replaced or recharged, and you are still outside of the digital network). n Display settings Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background picture (wallpaper) in the standby mode. To activate or deactivate wallpaper, in the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper > On or Off. To select the wallpaper you wish to display, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings >
Wallpaper > Select wallpap. 2. Highlight the Graphics folder, and select Open. 3. Browse the folder. 4. When you find an image, select Options > Set as wallpap. Color scheme You can change the color of some display components in your phone, such as indicators and signal bars. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Color schemes. 2. Select the color scheme of your choice. Banner Banner is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. 50 S e t t i n g s If your wireless service provider supports this feature, choose whether the display shows the operator logo when the phone is in the idle state. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Banner >
Default or Customize. Screen saver timeout If you have turned the screen saver on, the screen saver is activated when no function of the phone is used after a preset period of time. Press any key to deactivate the screen saver. You can set your phone to display a screen saver after a preset time or after a custom time (up to 60 minutes) of your choosing. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Screen 1. saver time-out. 2. Scroll to and select the option of your choice. 3. To set a custom time (up to 60 minutes), select Other, enter the custom time, and select OK. Display brightness You can change the brightness of your phone display. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Display brightness. 2. Scroll up or down to adjust the brightness level to your preference. 3. Select OK to accept your settings. n Tone settings From this menu, you can adjust the ringing volume, keypad tones, and other tone settings for the currently active profile. See "Customize a profile," p. 43, for more information on profile settings. Select Menu > Settings > Tone settings, and one of the following options:
Incoming call alertSelect how the device notifies you of an incoming call. Ringing toneSelect the ringing tone for incoming calls. Ringing volumeSet the volume of your ringing tone. Vibrating alertTurn the vibrating alert On or Off. Message alert toneSelect the tone for received messages. 51 S e t t i n g s Keypad tonesSet the volume of your keypad tones (or turn them off). Warning tonesTurn warning and confirmation tones On or Off. Alert forDefine which caller groups the selected profile will accept or decline. n Phone details From this menu, you can check details of your phone service. Select Menu >
Settings > Phone details, and one of the following options:
User detailsDisplay the mobile ID number (MIN) and own number (MDN). Version detailsDisplay the phone model, hardware version, and software version of the phone. System detailsDisplay the system ID, channel, preferred roaming list (PRL), mode, and frequency of the phone service. n Enhancement settings The enhancement settings menu is shown only if the phone is or has been connected to a compatible enhancement. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > Headset, Handsfree, Loopset, TTY/TDD (carrier dependent), or Charger. Headset Scroll to and select an option, to enter the submenu and modify its settings. Default profileChoose the profile you wish to be automatically activated when a headset is connected Automatic answerAnswer calls automatically after one ring when a headset is connected. Select On or Off. Handsfree Scroll to and select an option, to enter the submenu and modify its settings. Default profileSelect the profile to automatically activate when your phone is connected to a car kit. See also "Customize a profile," p. 43. Automatic answerSet so calls are answered automatically after one ring when a car kit is connected. Select On or Off. LightsChoose to keep the phone lights always on, or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Select On or Automatic. 52 S e t t i n g s Loopset The LPS-4 Loopset (for use with T-coil equipped hearing aids) is recommended for use with your phone. Scroll to and select the option of your choice, to enter the submenu and select Use loopset > Yes or No to modify the settings. TTY/TDD This feature is dependent on your carrier. In addition to the Nokia phone, you will need the following for TTY/TDD communication:
A TTY/TDD device that is cellular ready or cellular compatible.
A cable for connecting the TTY/TDD to your Nokia phone, usually supplied by the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device. Set up the TTY/TDD profile To connect your phone directly to the TTY/TDD device, set up the TTY/TDD profile. 1. Connect one end of the cable to the TTY/TDD device. 2. 3. Insert the other end of the cable into the headset jack. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > TTY/
TDD > Use TTY > Yes. TTY/TDD calls Important: Some manufacturers of TTY/TDD devices suggest that the phone be at least 18 inches from the TTY/TDD device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide or contact its manufacturer for detailed instructions and safety information.
Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device for a connecting cable that is compatible with the Nokia phone.
TTY/TDD communications depend on network availability. Check with your service provider for availability and description of services. Make a call 1. In the standby mode, enter the number, and press the call key. 2. When the receiving party answers, begin typing your conversation on the TTY/
TDD. 3. Press the end key to end the call. 53 S e t t i n g s Receive a call 1. Make sure the TTY/TDD device is connected to your phone. 2. Press the call key to answer the call, and type your responses on the TTY/TDD. 3. Press the end key to end the call. Charger In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > Charger, and one of the following options:
Default profileChoose the profile you wish to be automatically activated when your phone is connected to the charger. LightsChoose to keep the phone lights always on or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Select On or Automatic. n Security settings When first accessing the security settings, enter the preset lock code. By default, this is the last four digits of your phone number. Your wireless service provider, may preset the lock code to a four-digit number such as 1234 or 0000. If these numbers do not work, contact your wireless service provider. Restrict calls Call restriction is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can restrict the calls your phone can make and receive. When calls are restricted, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your phone. Contact your service provider for the restriction password. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Call restrictions. 2. Enter the security code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. 3. Select the type of calls you wish to restrict:
Restrict outgoing callsCalls cannot be made: Select, Add restriction, Edit, or Delete. Restrict incoming callsCalls cannot be received: Select or All calls. 54 S e t t i n g s Activate or deactivate phone lock The phone lock feature protects your phone from unauthorized outgoing calls or unauthorized access to information stored in the phone. When phone lock is activated, Phone locked is displayed each time you turn your phone on. When the device is locked, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. Call not allowed is displayed if you attempt to place a call while phone is locked. To answer a call with phone lock on, select Answer or the call key. 1. 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. 3. Select one of the following options:
In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Phone lock.
OnTurns on the phone lock feature after power on.
OffImmediately turns off the phone lock feature. If you selected On, you must enter your lock code and the lock code must be accepted before the phone will function normally. Allow numbers when phone locked When phone lock is on, the only outgoing calls that can be made are to the emergency number programed into your phone (for example, 911) and the numbers stored in the Allowed number when phone locked location. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Allowed number when phone locked. 2. Enter the lock code and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. 3. Enter the phone number; or select Search to recall the number from the phone book, and select OK. 4. Press the call key to press the call. Change lock code When you change your lock code, make sure you store it in a safe place, away from your phone. Avoid entering access codes similar to emergency numbers such as 911 to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. The preset lock code, by default, is the last four digits of your phone number. Depending on your wireless service provider, the preset lock code can be a four-
55 S e t t i n g s digit number such as 1234 or 0000. If these codes do not work, contact your wireless service provider for help. If you enter an incorrect lock code five times in a row, your phone will prompt you for the 5-digit, security code. By default, the security code is 12345, a five-digit number. Note: If the wrong lock code is entered five times in a row, your phone will not accept additional entries for 5 minutes, even if you power off the phone between incorrect entries. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change lock code. 2. Enter the current (or default) lock code, and select OK. 3. Select Change lock code. 4. Enter the new lock code (must be 4 characters in length), and select OK. 5. Reenter the new lock code for verification, and select OK. When changing your lock code, make sure you store it in a safe place, away from your device. Avoid entering access codes similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental emergency calls. Voice privacy Voice privacy is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, the voice privacy feature protects the privacy of your current phone conversation from other callers placing phone calls on your same network. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Voice privacy >
On or Off. n Network The menu options in your phone are based on your service providers network. The network determines which options actually appear in the phone menu. Check with your service provider for more information. The Network menu allows you to customize the way your phone chooses a network in which to operate while you are within or outside of your primary or home system. Your phone is set to search for the most cost-effective network. If your phone cannot find a preferred network, it selects a network automatically based on the option you choose in the Network menu. 56 S e t t i n g s Roaming options To set your phone to roam or search for another network when you are not in your home area, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Roaming options. 2. Select one of the following options:
Home onlyMake and receive calls in your home area only. AutomaticPhone automatically searches for service in another digital network. Automatic A scans the channels in the A carriers system. Automatic B scans the B system. The roaming rate applies when your are not in the home service area. 3. Select OK, if necessary, to confirm the activation. Mode You can choose whether your phone uses digital or analog service. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Mode, and one of the following service options:
Digital pref.The phone works in digital mode but will also work in analog mode when digital mode is unavailable. Digital onlyThe phone only works in digital mode. Analog onlyThe phone only works in analog mode. n Network services The following features are network services. See "Network services," p. 5. Store a feature code 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Network feature setting. 2. Enter the feature code from your service provider (for example, *633 Forward if busy), and select OK. 3. Select the type of forwarding that matches the feature code you entered (for example, Call forwarding). 57 S e t t i n g s The activated feature code is now stored in your phone, and you are returned to the Feature code: field. Continue entering other feature codes (for example, *633), or press the end key to return to standby mode. Once you enter a network feature code successfully, the feature becomes visible in the Network services menu. Call forwarding Call forwarding tells your network to redirect incoming calls to another number. Call forwarding is a network service and may not work the same in all networks, so contact your wireless provider for availability. Activate 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding and select one of the following options: Forward all calls, Forward if busy, Forward if not answered, Forward if out of reach, or Cancel all call forwarding. 2. Select Activate. 3. Scroll to and select the destination to which your calls will be forwarded. 4. Enter the number to which your calls, data, or other information will be forwarded, and select OK. Call waiting If your wireless provider supports this feature, call waiting notifies you of an incoming call even while you are in a call. You can then accept, decline, or ignore the incoming call. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call waiting > Activate or Cancel. 2. During a call, select Answer or the call key to answer the waiting call. The first call is put on hold. 3. Press the end key to end the active call. Send own caller ID when calling If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can prevent your number from appearing on the receiving party caller ID. 58 S e t t i n g s In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Send my caller ID >Yes or No. Select your own phone number If your wireless service provider supports this feature, and you have more than one number, you can select the number to be used. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Own number selection n Restore factory settings This option resets some of the menu settings to their original values. It does not delete data that you have entered or downloaded, or affect entries in your contacts list. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Restore factory settings. Enter the security code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 54. Note: Depending on your wireless provider, your device may sometimes ask you for the security code (defaulted to 12345) instead of the lock code. 59 G a l l e r y 9. Gallery Pictures and ring tones can be saved to folders in the Gallery, or to folders created of your own. Images and tones can be downloaded using web sites. n Open the gallery In the standby mode, select Menu > Gallery.where you can View folders, Add folder, Delete folder, and Rename folder. n View folders 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Gallery > View folders > Images, Graphics, or Tones > Open. 2. Scroll to and select an image, graphic or tones, and Options > Open, Delete, Move, Rename, Set as wallpap., Details or Sort. 60 10. Games G a m e s Challenge yourself or a friend to one of the fun games in your phone: Air Glide, Bowling, and Sky Diver. Some menus listed are network services. Contact your wireless provider for more information. n Play a game In the standby mode, select Menu > Games > Select game. 1. 2. Scroll to a game, and select Options > Open or the call key. 3. Select one of the following options (if supported by the particular game):
New gameLaunch a new game. High scoresView the high scores for this game (if previously played). InstructionsView instructions for playing the game. Scroll down to read more. n Game settings 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Games. 2. Scroll to and select one of the following game submenus:
Select gameSelect a game or enter a game option list. See "Game details," p. 61. MemoryCheck the available memory for games and game-related applications. SettingsTurn Game sounds, Game lights, and Shakes on or off. n Game details To display the name, version, and size of a selected game, select Options >
Details. 61 V o i c e 11. Voice n Voice tag dialing You can dial up to 25 stored numbers using voice tag dialing. Before using voice tags, note that:
Voice tags are not language-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice.
You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it.
Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags, and use them in a quiet environment.
Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Voice tag use may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. Assign a voice tag Before you use voice dialing, assign a voice tag to the number. 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to enter the contacts list. 2. Highlight the contact to assign a voice tag, select Details > Options > Add voice tag > Start. 3. Speak clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone automatically stops recording, saves, and replays the voice tag. The icon is displayed next to commands that have voice tags assigned. If the recording is not successful, your phone displays Voice system error. Select Options > Add voice tag, and repeat Step 3. Dial a number In the standby mode, select and hold Contacts. When you hear several beeps, Speak now is displayed. Release Contacts. Pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. 62 V o i c e When the phone finds the voice tag, Found: is displayed, and the phone automatically dials the number. If the phone does not locate a number or recognize the voice tag, No match found is displayed. Voice tags After you have associated a voice tag to a contact, in the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice tags > Options > Playback, Change, or Delete. n Voice commands Set as many as five voice commands, to allow hands-free operation of certain phone features. Assign a voice tag to a command Before using voice commands, you must first add a voice tag to the phone function. 1. 2. Select the phone function you wish to tag: Profiles, Voice mailbox, Voice In the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice commands. 3. recorder or Call log. If necessary, scroll to an option associated with that function, select Options > Add command. 4. Select Start, and speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you want to cancel the recording. The phone replays and saves the recorded tag. that have voice tags assigned. appears next to commands Activate a voice command After you have associated a voice tag with a phone function, you can issue a command by speaking the voice tag. 1. Select and hold Contacts. 2. When Speak now appears, pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. When the phone finds the voice tag, Found: is displayed, and the phone plays the recognized voice tag through the earpiece. The function you requested is activated. 63 V o i c e Options After you have associated a voice tag to a command, in the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice commands > Options > Playback, Change, or Delete:
n Voice recorder This feature allows you to record speech or sound with your phone and listen to them later. The total available time is 30 seconds if no memos have been stored. The maximum length of a recording depends on how much memory remains available. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. Record speech or sound 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Voice > Voice recorder > Record. 2. After the recorder start tone is heard, begin recording speech or sound. 3. When you are finished recording, select Stop. 4. Enter the title for the recording, and select OK. Options After you have saved the recording to the Recordings list, highlight the recording, and select one of the following options: Playback, Delete, Edit title, and Alarm or Add alarm. 64 12. Organizer O r g a n i z e r Your phone contains features to help organize your everyday life, including an alarm clock, calendar, calculator, countdown timer, and stopwatch. n Alarm clock Set an alarm The alarm clock is based on the phone clock. The alarm sounds an alert for any time you specify. 1. 2. Enter the time for the alarm (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm if you select12-hour format. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time. Alarm on is displayed briefly in the display, and standby mode. is displayed in the Change the time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time >
On. 2. Enter the time for the alarm (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you select12-hour format). Alarm on is displayed briefly, and is displayed in the standby mode. Set the alarm tone You can set the tone to play when the alarm sounds. 1. 2. Highlight Standard, Ringing tone, or Open Gallery; and select a tone. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm tone. Alarm conditions When the alarm sounds, your phone beeps, vibrates (if vibrating alert is on for the currently active profile), and lights up the display. If you do not press a key, the alarm stops (snoozes) for 10 minutes, then sounds again. 65 O r g a n i z e r With the phone on, select Stop to shut the alarm off, or select Snooze. The alarm stops for 10 minutes and Snooze on is displayed. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop, the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Turn an alarm off In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time > Off. n Calendar The calendar tracks reminders, calls to make, meetings, and birthdays. It can even sound an alarm for any of these events. Monthly view provides an overview of the selected month and weeks. It also allows you to jump to a specific date. Any days or dates that appear in bold font contain calendar notes such as a meeting or reminder. Open In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. Move the cursor in some calendar views with the up and down scroll keys. Go to a date 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Go to date. 2. Enter the date (for example, mm/dd/yyyy), and select OK. Note a specific date You can choose from five types of notes: Meeting, Call, Birthday, Memo, and Reminder. Your phone asks for further information depending on which note you choose. You also have the option to set an alarm for any note that you select. 1. Go to the date for which you want to set a reminder. See "Go to a date," p. 66, in the previous section if you need more information. 66 O r g a n i z e r 2. From the monthly view (with the go to date highlighted), select Options >
Make a note, and one of the following note types:
MeetingEnter a subject, a location, and a start and end time. You can then set an alarm. CallEnter a phone number, a name, and the time. You can then set an alarm. BirthdayEnter the persons name, and year of birth. You can then set an alarm. MemoEnter a subject and an end date, and set an alarm. ReminderEnter the subject, and set an alarm. 3. Enter your note, and select Options > Save. View notes (day view) To view the created calendar notes, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. 2. Scroll to the date that has a note. (Days with notes are in bold font.) 3. Select Options > View day. 4. To view a highlighted note, select Options > View. Send a note 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. 2. Scroll to the date containing the note. Any days containing notes are in bold font. 3. Select Options > View day. 4. Scroll to the note, and select Options > Send note > Via calendar or Via text 5. msg. If you selected Via calendar, enter the number for the recipient or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. If you selected Via text msg., the note appears as a text message. 6. 7. Select Add number. 8. Enter the number for the recipient, or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. 67 O r g a n i z e r 9. Select Options > Send. Receive notes When you receive a calendar note in calendar-to-calendar (vCal) format, Calendar note received is displayed. When you receive a calendar note as a text message, a message notification appears in the standby mode. You can then view, save, or discard the note, and set an alarm for any date and time. n Calculator The calculator in your phone adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, calculates the square and the square root, changes the sign of the number entered, and converts currency values. Note: This calculator has a limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calculator. 2. Enter the first number in the calculation. Press # for a decimal point if necessary. Press * to cycle through the add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/) characters. Pause briefly to select the displayed character. 3. Enter the second number in your calculation. 4. Select Options (equals is highlighted). To perform a square or square root calculation, select Options > Square or Square root. To change the sign, select Options > Change sign, or scroll to the key. Currency converter You can convert foreign currency to domestic directly from the standby mode or from the Calculator menu. 1. In the standby mode, enter a currency amount to convert. Select Menu >
Organizer > Calculator and enter a currency amount to convert. 2. Select Options > To home or To foreign. To homeconverts foreign currency to domestic currency To foreignconverts domestic currency to foreign currency 68 O r g a n i z e r 3. Enter the exchange rate (press # to insert a decimal), and select OK. You can also edit the exchange rate at any time. When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calculator > Options >
Exchange rate, and one of the following:
Foreign unit expressed in domestic unitsThe number of home units it takes to make one unit of foreign currency. Domestic unit expressed in foreign unitsThe number of foreign units it takes to make one unit of your home currency. 2. Enter the exchange rate, and select OK. n Countdown timer You can enter a specified countdown time (up to 99 hours and 59 minutes). When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm. The countdown timer only works when the phone is on. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer. Set the countdown timer 1. 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Enter a note for the timer, and select OK. The icon appears in the standby mode when the countdown timer is set. When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm, displays the timer note, and flashes its lights.
Press any key during the alarm to stop the timer.
After 30 seconds the timer alert expires automatically. Change the time After you have set the timer, you can change the time. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer > Set timer:. 2. Enter the new time, and select OK. 69 O r g a n i z e r 3. Leave the note as it was, or enter a new note, and select OK. Stop the timer After you have set the timer, you can stop the timer at any time. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer > Stop timer. n Stopwatch Your phone has a stopwatch that displays time in hours, minutes, seconds, and fractions of a second in hh:mm:ss:s format. Using the stopwatch or allowing it to run in the background when using other features increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Measure time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Stopwatch > Split timing or Lap timing > Start. The running time is displayed on the screen. 2. Select Split to note the lapsed time. The timer continues to run. The split time appears below the running time. If you split the time more than once, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. Scroll to see previous measured times. 3. Select Lap to note the lap time. The clock stops, then starts immediately from zero. The lap time appears below the running time. If you take more than one lap time, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. When you select Stop, the total time appears at the top. 4. Select Stop to end the timing. The total time is displayed on the screen. 5. Select Options > Save to save the split or lap time. 6. Enter a name for the measurement, and select OK. If you do not enter a name, the total time is used as the default title for the time. Operation note If you press the end key and return to standby mode, the clock continues to run in the background and appears in the upper left corner of the screen. 70 O r g a n i z e r To return to the stopwatch screens:
1. 2. To stop the clock, select Stop. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Stopwatch >Continue. Options The following options are available with the stopwatch: Continue, Show last time, Split timing, Lap timing, View times, and Delete times. 71 P C C o n n e c t i v i t y 13. PC Connectivity You can create and send text and picture messages, and synchronize contacts and calendar between your phone and a compatible PC. Some of the features available in PC Suite are carrier dependent. Check www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia Web site for the latest version of this guide, additional information, downloads, and services related to your Nokia product. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. 72 E n h a n c e m e n t s 14. Enhancements Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from LCH-12, AC-1, ACP-7 or ACP-12. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. A few practical rules about accessories and enhancements.
Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children.
When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Check regularly that enhancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly.
Installation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualified personnel only. Power
Standard 1070 mAh Li-Ion Battery (BL-6C)
Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7)
Travel Charger (ACP-12)
Mobile Charger (LCH-12)
Retractable Charger (AC-1) Audio
Headset (HS-5)
Boom Headset (HDB-4)
Loopset (LPS-4)
FM Radio Headset (HS-2R) 73 E n h a n c e m e n t s
Retractable Headset (HS-10) Car
Handsfree Car Kit (CK-7W)
Mobile Holder (MBC-17)
Mobile Lighter Charger (LCH-12)
Headrest Handsfree (BHF-1) 74 15. Battery information B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n n Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger. Overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. To prolong battery life of NiMh batteries, discharge the battery from time to time by leaving your device switched on until it turns itself off. Do not attempt to discharge the battery by any other means. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15C and 25C (59F and 77F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. 75 B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose batteries as household waste. n Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the packaging and inspect the hologram label using the following steps:
Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it and take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1.When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2.When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. 76 B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n 3.Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for example 12345678919876543210. Turn the battery so that the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokia.com/
batterycheck. What if your battery is not authentic?
If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery. 77 C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage.
Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it.
Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged.
Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics.
Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards.
Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide.
Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics.
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device.
Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation.
Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses).
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
Use chargers indoors.
Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes, before sending your device to a service facility. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. 78 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n Additional safety information n Operating environment Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 2.2 cm (7/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with a hearing aid should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. n Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cm
(6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should:
79 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n
Always keep the device more than 15.3 cm (6 inches) from the pacemaker when the device is switched on.
Do not carry the device in a breast pocket.
Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move the device away. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. n Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. n Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel 80 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. n Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this phone, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call:
1. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. phone for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. n Certification Information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. 81 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit set by ICNIRP is 2.2 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be well below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value when tested according to international testing procedures for use at the ear is 0.72 W/kg. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokiausa.com. USA and Canada: The SAR limit of USA (FCC) and Canada (IC) is 1.6 W/kg averaged over 1 gram of tissue. This device model has also been tested against this SAR limit. The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for use at the ear is 1.21 W/Kg and when properly worn on the body is 1.17 W/kg. Information about this device can be found on the FCC's website at https://
gullfoss2.fcc.gov/prod/oet/cf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm by searching the equipment authorization system using FCC ID: QMNRH-71. n Technical information DimensionsWidth 49.9 mm (1.96 inches); length 108.3 mm (4.26 inches);
depth 23.2 mm (0.91 inch) Weight3.84 oz (108.8 g) with BL-6C Li-Ion Battery Volume5.95 cu in (97.5 cu cm) Frequency range (Tx)PCS 1851.251908.75 MHz;
Cellular 824.70848.37 MHz Frequency range (Rx)PCS 1931.251988.75 MHz;
Cellular 869.70893.37 MHz GPS Frequency1575.42 MHz n Battery information This section provides information about battery charging times with the Travel Charger (ACP-12) and the Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7), talk-times, and standby times. Be aware that the information in this section is subject to change. For more information, contact your service provider. 82 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n Charging times The following charging times are approximate with the BL-6C 1070 mAh Li-Ion battery:
Travel Charger (ACP-12): up to 1 hour 45 minutes Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7): up to 3 hours 45 minutes Talk and standby times Operation times are estimates only and depend on signal strength, phone use, network conditions, features used, battery age and condition (including charging habits), temperatures to which the battery is exposed, and many other factors. Talk time: up to 3.7 hours cellular and 4.1 hours PCS Standby time: up to 12 days n Patent information Manufactured or sold under one or more of the following US patents:
4969192 5491718 5596571 5699482 5701392 5754976 5793744 5802465 5859843 5889770 5924026 5930233 5956332 5991627 6009328 6072787 6078570 6128322 6148209 6167273 6198928 6510148 6556824 6567389 6570860 6591116 6775548 83 IndexNumerics1-touch dialing 27alarm clock 76antenna 13anykey answer 50applications 85automate voicemail 39automatic redial 51automatic update of service 51auto-update 57Bback coverremoving 14replacing 14, 17banner 58batteries and chargers 90batterycharging 14charging times 96removing 14replacing 14, 17talk and standby times 96battery information 96business cards 31Ccalculator 80calendar 77call duration 45call forwarding 66call log 43caller groups 26calling cards 52callsanswering 19in-call options 20making 18care and maintenance 91certification information (SAR) 94chargerconnecting 14information 90times 96color schemes 58contacts list 25add 25delete 29edit 28send 31view 30countdown timer 81currency converter 81customer care 7Ddata/fax calls 53dialing codes 39display language 54display settings 58downloadapplications 85Eemergency calls 94while using wireless Internet 75with keypad locked 55enhancement settings 59handsfree 59headset 59, 60music stand 61TTY/TDD 60enhancements 88ESN 7exchange rate 81FFCC information 94feature codes 65Ggallery 68games 69Hhandsfree 59headset 15, 59, 60help 7help text 12, 56Iindicators and icons 9KKeyguard 20automatic 54Llanguages 54loudspeaker 19Mmessage folders 40messagesdelete 41minibrowser messages 40picture messages 36text messages 32voice messages 38minibrowser 74minibrowser messages 40music stand 61NNetwork Services 6organizer 76Ppatent information 97phone settings 54picture messages 36predictive text 23profiles 48Qquick keys 9Rrestore factory settings 67restrict calls 61Ssafety 4important safety information 92screen saver 58scrolling 12security code 62, 63, 64security settings 61send own caller ID 67setdate 57time 56settings 50shared memory 7shortcuts 12start screen 9stopwatch 82Ttalk and standby times 96technical information 96text entry 22text messages 32time and date settings 56timed profiles 48tone settings 59, 64touch tones 55TTY/TDD 60turn phone off 15turn phone on 15Vviewcall duration 45call times 44data/ call duration 46dialed numbers 44minibrowser duration 46missed calls 43own phone number 67picture messages 37received calls 44saved messages 41voice 70voice commands 71voice dialing 70voice messages 38voice privacy 64voice recorder 72voicemail 38volumeadjusting 19using the loudspeaker 19Wwallpaper 58warranty 111welcome note 55wireless Internet 74make an emergency call 75receive a call while online 75sign on 74XXpress-on covers 16 84
| 1 | Manual 4 | Users Manual | 422.09 KiB | December 06 2005 / November 06 2005 |
Nokia 2125i User Guide LEGAL INFORMATION Issue 1 931169X26 1 Part No. 9240273, Issue No. 1 Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nokia 2125i, Xpress-on, Pop-Port, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Printed in Canada 2005 US Patent No. 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright 1999-2005. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 2125i product. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED AS IS. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY AND RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, technology, or software subject to export laws and regulations from the U.S. and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. 2 Table of Contents T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s For your safety 41.Phone at a glance 92.Set up your phone 133.Text entry 214. Contacts list 245.Messages 316.Call log 427.Profiles 468.Settings 479.Gallery 6510.Games 6611.Voice 6712.Minibrowser 7013.Organizer 7314.Applications 8115.PC Connectivity 8216.Enhancements 8417.Battery information 86Care and maintenance 89Additional safety information 91 3 F o r y o u r s a f e t y For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the phone at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. 4 F o r y o u r s a f e t y WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your phone. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the CDMA 800, CDMA 1900, and AMPS networks. Contact Virgin Mobile for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Network services To use the phone you must have service from Virgin Mobile. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with Virgin Mobile before you can utilize network services. Virgin Mobile may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured. This configuration may include 5 F o r y o u r s a f e t y changes in menu names, menu order and icons. Contact Virgin Mobile for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as the Minibrowser, require network support for these technologies. Shared memory The following features in this device may share memory: contacts, text messages, images, and tones in Gallery, calendar notes, games, and applications. Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features sharing memory. Your phone may display a message that the memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. Some of the features, such as images, tones in Gallery, text messages, and applications may have a certain amount of memory specially allotted to them in addition to the memory shared with other features. 6 Welcome W e l c o m e Congratulations on your purchase of the Nokia 2125i mobile phone. Your phone provides many functions that are practical for daily use, such as a hands-free loudspeaker, alarm clock, calculator, calendar. Your phone can also connect to a PC, laptop, or other device using a data cable. To personalize your phone, you can set your favorite ring tones or select an Xpress-onTM color cover. Get help Find your phone label If you need help, Nokia Customer Care is available for assistance. Before calling, we recommend that you write down the following information and have it available:
Electronic serial number (ESN)
Your zip code The ESN is found on the type label, which is located beneath the battery on the back of the phone. See "Remove the back cover," p. 14 and "Remove the battery," p. 14. Contact Nokia Please have your product with you when contacting either of the numbers below:
Nokia Customer Care Center, USA Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Boulevard, Suite #160 Tampa, Florida 33614 Tel: 1-888-NOKIA-2U (1-888-665-4228) Fax: 1-813-249-9619 TTY/TDD users: 1-800-24-NOKIA (1-800-246-6542) Customer Care Center, Canada Nokia Products Ltd. 601 Westney Road South 7 W e l c o m e Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 1-888-22-NOKIA (1-888-226-6542) Fax: 1-905-427-1070 Updates From time to time, Nokia updates this guide to reflect changes. The latest version and an interactive tutorial for this product may be available at the web site www.nokiausa.com. Accessibility solutions Nokia is committed to making mobile phones easy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities. For more information visit the web site at www.nokiaaccessibility.com. 8 1. Phone at a glance P h o n e a t a g l a n c e
Power key and flashlight
(1)
Earpiece (2)
Right selection key (3)
End key (4)
Keypad (5)
Connection port (6)
Microphone (7)
Charger port (8)
Scroll up and down key
(9)
Call key (10)
Left selection key (11)
Display screen (12) The start screen Depending on your wireless service provider and the model number of your device, some or all of the following selection keys may appear on the start screen. 9 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e The start screen is home base and indicates that your phone is in the standby mode. Signal strength (1)A higher bar indicates a stronger network signal. Battery level (2)A higher bar indicates more charge in the battery. Menu (3)Press the left selection key to select this option. Contacts (4)Press the right selection key to select this option. Quick keys In the standby mode, press the scroll down key to access the contacts list, and press the scroll up key to activate the flashlight. Indicators and icons Depending on your wireless service provider and the model number of your phone, some or all of the following indicators and icons may appear in the standby mode:
You have new text or picture messages. See "Text messages," p. 28. You have new voice messages. See "Voice messages," p. 33. Device keypad is locked. See "Keyguard," p. 20. Device is set to the silent profile. See "Profiles," p. 45. Alarm clock is set to on. See "Alarm clock," p. 62. Countdown timer is running. See "Countdown timer," p. 67. Stopwatch timer running in the background. See "Stopwatch," p. 67. Integrated hands-free is active. See "Use the loudspeaker," p. 19. Timed profile is selected. See "Profiles," p. 45. An enhancement is connected to the device. See "Enhancements," p. 73. or Voice privacy encryption is active in the network. See "Security settings," 56. 10 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e or Location info sharing is set to Emergency or On. See "Location information sharing," p. 46. Vibrating alert is active. See "Profiles," p. 45. You are roaming outside your home network. See "Roaming options," p. 60. You are in a 1XRTT network. See "Network services," p. 5. You are in a digital network. See "Network services," p. 5. You are in an analog network. See "Network services," p. 5. or Off hook, call or data call in progress. Phone menus Phone features are grouped according to function and are accessed through the main menus. Each main menu contains submenus and lists from which you can select or view items and customize your phone features. To access these menus and submenus use the scroll method or use a shortcut. Some features may not be available, depending on your network. For more information, contact your wireless provider. The scroll method 1. In the standby mode, select Menu, and scroll up or down through the main menus. As you scroll through the menus, the menu number appears in the upper right corner of the display. Below the number is a scroll bar with a tab that moves up or down on the right side of the display screen as you scroll through the menus. This display provides a visual representation of your current position in the menu structure. 2. When you arrive at a menu, press the left selection key to enter submenus or, when the browser appears on the display, select Connect to enter that menu.
Select Back (the right selection key) to return to the previous menu.
Select the end key from any submenu or select Exit from the main menu level to return to the standby mode. 11 P h o n e a t a g l a n c e Shortcuts To go directly to almost any menu or submenu, as well as activate most features use a shortcut. In the standby mode, select Menu; then within 3 seconds, press the key or keys associated with the menu function you would like to view or activate. For example, to select the meeting profile, select Menu 6-1-3-1 from standby mode (Menu > 6 Settings > 1 Profiles > 3 Meeting > 1 Activate). After a brief pause, the Meeting profile is activated. (in spec, Profiles is
{qtn.sett.profiles.menu} but this isnt in TNT db) In-phone help Many features have brief descriptions (help text) that can be viewed on the display. In order to view the descriptions, you must first activate help text. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off. To view these descriptions, scroll to a feature, and wait for about 15 seconds. Select More, when necessary, to view all of the description, or select Back to exit. 12 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 2. Set up your phone Antenna Your phone has an internal antenna that is located toward the top of the phone. In the Nokia 2125i phone, the GPS antenna is internal and is activated when you place emergency calls or when Location on is selected from the Location info sharing menu. See "Location information sharing," p. 46. Hold the phone as you would any other telephone with the antenna area pointed up and over your shoulder. Note: As with any other radio transmitting device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the device is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna while operating the device optimizes the antenna performance and the battery life. Change the battery Always switch the device off, and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. 13 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the ACP-7 and ACP-12 chargers. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Note: Always switch off the power and disconnect the charger and any other device before removing the cover . Avoid touching electronic components while changing the cover. Always store and use the device with the cover attached. Remove the back cover 1. With the back of the phone facing you, push down on the back cover release button. 2. Slide the back cover toward the bottom of the phone and remove. Remove the battery After you have removed the back cover, insert your finger into the finger grip, and lift the battery from its compartment. 14 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Replace the battery 1. Position the battery so the positive and negative indicators on the battery match up with the positive and negative indicators on the phone. The battery label should face away from the phone. 2. Insert the battery, gold-colored contact end first, into the battery slot. 3. Push down on the other end of the battery to snap it into place. Replace the back cover Slide the back cover toward the top of the phone until the back cover is securely in place. Charge the battery 1. Plug the charger into a standard ac outlet. 2. Insert the charger output plug into the round jack at the bottom end of the phone. After a few seconds, the battery indicator on the display starts to scroll from bottom to top. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. 15 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Turn your phone on or off 1. To turn your phone on or off, press and hold the power key on top of the phone for at least 3 seconds. 2. Enter the lock code. if necessary, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 56. Connect the headset A compatible headset, such as HS-5, may be purchased with your phone or separately as an enhancement. See "Enhancements," p. 73. Warning: When using the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Important: The headset may affect your ability to hear sounds around you. Do not use this headset in situations that may endanger your safety. 1. Plug the headset connector into the Pop-Port connector at the bottom end of your phone. appears in the standby mode. 2. Position the headset on your ear. With the headset connected, make, answer, and end calls as usual.
Use the keypad to enter numbers.
Press the call key to place a call.
Press the end key to end a call. Change the Xpress-on covers Note: Always switch off the power, and disconnect the charger and any other device, before removing the cover. Do not touch electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the device with the covers attached. 16 To change the Xpress-on covers, first remove the back cover and battery. S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Remove the front cover Gently pull the bottom of the front cover away from the rest of the phone. Install the keymat and front cover 1. Remove the keymat from the old front cover. 2. Place the keymat into the new front cover. 17 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 3. Press the front cover and keymat against the phone, and snap the front cover into place. 4. Replace the battery and back cover. Make a call Use the keypad 1. Enter the phone number (including the area code), and press the call key. To delete a character to the left of the cursor, select Clear. 2. Press the end key to end the call, or select End call to cancel the call attempt. Use the contacts list 1. 2. Press the call key to make the call, or select Details to view details of the In the standby mode, scroll down to the entry you wish to view. entry. Use the last dialed number 1. In the standby mode, press the call key to display the last 20 numbers dialed. 2. Scroll to the number (or name) you wish to redial, and press the call key. Conference calls Conference calling is a network service that allows you to take part in a conference call with two other participants. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. With the first participant on the line, select Options > New call. 3. Enter the phone number of the second participant, or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list. 4. Select Flash and the first participant is put on hold. 18 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e 5. When the second participant answers, press the call key to connect the calls. 6. To end the conference call, press the end key. Answer calls Answer, silence, or decline an incoming call Silence and Decline are carrier dependent features. 1. Press the call or Answer key to answer the call. 2. To mute the ringing tone, select Silence. If you do not answer the call, the call is forwarded to voicemail. 3. To dismiss and forward the call to voicemail (a carrier dependent feature), select Decline after you have muted the ringing tone, or press the end key at any time. Answer a call with the keypad locked To answer a call with the keypad locked, press the call key. During the call, all features function normally. When you end, silence or decline the call, the keypad automatically relocks. See "Keyguard," p. 20. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. Adjust the earpiece volume While in a call, scroll up or down to adjust the volume of the earpiece. When you adjust the volume, a bar chart appears in the display to indicate the volume level. Use the loudspeaker You can use your phone as a loudspeaker during a call.
To activate the loudspeaker, select Loudspeaker.
To deactivate the loudspeaker during a call, select Handset. The loudspeaker is deactivated automatically when a call (or a call attempt) ends, or when certain enhancements are connected. 19 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Options during a call Many of the options that used during a call are network services. Check with your wireless service provider for more information. 1. Select Options to display the following:
Mute or UnmuteSilence your end of the call. Loudspeaker or HandsetActivate or deactivate the loudspeaker while in a call. New callInitiate a conference call. See "Conference calls," p. 18. SaveSave the number you entered during a call. Add to contactSave the number you entered during a call to a contact already in the contacts list. End all callsDisconnect from all active calls. Touch tonesEnter the numbers, and select Tones to send the numbers as tones. ContactsView the contacts list. MenuView the phone menu. 2. Scroll to and select an option to activate the option or enter its submenu. Keyguard Use keyguard, to lock the keypad and prevent keys from being pressed accidentally. Remember to lock your phone keypad to prevent accidental calls. If the keypad is locked, it unlocks when you receive a call. After the call, the lock automatically reactivates. When the keyguard is on, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your phone. Enter the emergency number and press the call key. See "Automatic keyguard," p. 49. Lock the keypad Select Menu; then press * within 2 seconds. 20 S e t u p y o u r p h o n e Unlock the keypad Select Unlock; then press * within 2 seconds. 21 T e x t e n t r y 3. Text entry You can use two methods for entering text and numbers: standard mode and predictive text mode.
Select Clear to backspace the cursor and delete a character.
Select and hold Clear to backspace continuously and delete characters. Standard mode Standard mode is the only way to enter text into the contacts list and to rename caller groups. Text (Abc) Press a key once to insert the first letter on the key and twice for the second letter, etc. If you pause briefly, the last letter in the display is accepted and your device awaits the next entry.
Press 0 to enter a space and accept a completed word.
Press 1 to insert a period into your message.
Press and hold * to display a complete list of special characters.
Press and hold # to switch between letters and numbers. Numbers (123) To switch from Abc mode to 123 mode, press and hold # at any message entry screen. Punctuation and special characters While at any text entry screen, press * to display special characters (press and hold * if predictive text is on). Press * again to cycle through all available characters. To navigate through the list of special characters, use the scroll keys. Once a character is highlighted, select Insert to insert the character into your message. 22 T e x t e n t r y Predictive text mode To write messages quickly, use predictive text mode with your keypad and the built-in dictionary. Predictive text mode is much faster than the standard mode method because you do not need to scroll through the letters on each key to spell a word. The dictionary determines which word to enter based on the keys selected. Activate or deactivate At any text entry screen, select Options > Predictive text > English or Franais to activate predictive text; or select Prediction off to deactivate predictive text. Text entry The illustration below simulates your display each time a key is pressed. For example, to write Nokia with predictive text on and the English dictionary selected, press each of the following keys:
4 6 6 5 2
Press 0 to enter a space, and begin writing the next word.
If a displayed word is not correct, press * to see other matches. To return to the previous word in the list of matches, select Previous.
If ? appears after a word, select Spell to enter the word with the standard mode, and add the word to the dictionary.
Press 1 to insert a period into your message.
Press and hold * to display special characters. Press * again to cycle through all available characters. Change case and mode Press # to switch between uppercase, lowercase, and sentence case text and between standard and predictive text mode. Case and mode are indicated by the icons that appear in the upper left of the display screen, as follows:
Uppercase text: standard mode is on. Lowercase text: standard mode is on. 23 T e x t e n t r y Sentence case text: standard mode is on. This option is available only at the beginning of a sentence. Uppercase text: predictive text is on. Lowercase text: predictive text is on. Sentence case text: predictive text is on. This option is available only at the beginning of a sentence. 24 4. My Account M y A c c o u n t You can access your Virgin Mobile account to check or increase your balance. Access My Account To access your account, select Menu > My Account. This connects to the Virgin Mobile website. 25 C a l l h i s t o r y 5. Call history Call log stores information about the last 20 missed, 20 received, and 20 dialed calls. It also stores the duration of all calls. When the number of calls exceeds the maximum, the most recent call replaces the oldest. To view information for Outgoing calls, Incoming calls, or Missed calls, choose from the following options:
Call timeDisplays the date and time of the call Send messageSends a message to the number View numberDisplays the number Use numberEdits the number and associates a name with the number SaveEnters a name for the number and saves it to your contacts list Add to contactAdds the number to an existing entry in your contacts list, if the number is not associated with a name DeleteClears the number from memory CallCalls the number View missed calls Missed calls are calls that were never answered. The missed calls feature does not function when your phone is switched off. If the message icon appears in the display, select List and highlight the missed call. Select Options. From the standby mode, select Menu > Call History > Missed calls. Highlight a missed call and select Options. View incoming calls Received calls are calls that have been answered. In the standby mode, select Menu > Call History > Incoming calls. Highlight a received call and select Options. View dialed numbers Dialed numbers were called previously from your phone. In the standby mode, press the call key, or select Menu > Call History > Outgoing calls. Highlight a name or number and select Options. 26 C a l l h i s t o r y Call times To view up to five calls with the time each call occurred, your phone clock must be set. 1. Select Options > Call time. 2. Scroll through the calls listed to view the most recent call times made from this number. 3. Select Back to return to the options list. Delete call logs To delete any missed, dialed, or received calls from phone memory, in the standby mode, select Menu > Call History > Delete recent call lists and select the call type to clear: All, Missed, Incoming or Outgoing. Minibrowser calls Minibrowser is a network service used to access VXL and downloads. See Sign on to VXL, 70. With this feature, you can view the size or duration of sent or received data from the minibrowser. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and services by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. At the start screen, select Menu > Call History > Minibrowser calls and one of the following options:
Last sent browser dataView the size (KB) of the last sent browser data. Last received browser dataView the size (KB) of the last received data. All sent browser dataView the size (KB) of all sent browser data. All received browser dataView the size (KB) of all received browser data. Last browser sessionView the duration time of the last browser session. All browser sessionsView the duration time of all browser sessions. Clear all browser logsSelect OK > Yes to clear all browser logs. 27 M e s s a g e s 6. Messages If you have subscribed to a messaging service through your wireless provider, you can send and receive text messages to compatible phones that also subscribe to a compatible message service. You may also be able to send and receive picture messages and e-mail messages. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the 140 character limit for a single message. Longer messages will be sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options like Chinese, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. The number of characters remaining in a message are indicated by counter in upper right corner of screen. If there are special characters in your message, the indicator may not show the message length correctly. Note: When sending messages, your device may display Message sent. This is an indication that the message has been sent by your device to the message center number programed into your device. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. Text messages Write and send 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Create message. 2. Select Add number or Add e-mail to enter the recipients phone number or e-mail address; or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts list. Select OK. 3. Repeat step 2 to add more recipients, and select OK. 4. Select Options > Enter text. 28 M e s s a g e s 5. Compose a message using the keypad, and select Options > Send. Messaging options When you create or reply to a text message, depending on the mode of text input you use and the features supported by your wireless service provider, some or all of the following options are available:
SendSend the message to recipient. List recipientsSend the message to more than one recipient; or delete or edit the recipient list. SettingsSet or change how the message is sent (Urgent, Delivery note, or Callback no.). Save messageSave the message to a folder. Select Sent items, Templates, and Archive. Clear textErase the text clipboard. Exit editorSave the message to your Sent items folder automatically, and exit the message editor. Insert contactInsert a name from your contacts list into your message. Insert numberInsert a phone number or find a phone number in the contacts list, to insert into your message. Use templateInsert a predefined template into your message. Insert word/Edit wordEnter or edit the text of a new word that might not appear in the dictionary. This displays only when Predictive text is set to on. Insert symbolInsert a special character into your message. This displays only when Predictive text is set to on. Predictive textChoose a predictive text language, and turn the dictionary on or off. Templates Templates are short, prewritten messages that can be recalled and inserted into new text messages. 1. Open the blank message creation screen. See "Write and send," p. 28. 2. Select Options > Use template. 3. Scroll to and select one of the available templates. 4. Enter the text into your new message, and select Options > Send. 29 M e s s a g e s Read messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. When you receive a text message, a notification message and are displayed in the upper left corner in the standby mode. When you have unopened messages in your Inbox, 1. Select Show to read the message or Exit to remove the notification icon. is displayed. Scroll to view the whole message, if necessary. 2. Select Options > Reply. 3. Select Empty screen, and compose your reply. 4. To send your reply, select Options > Send. Options When you read a text message, some or all of the following options are available depending on the text input mode and the features supported by your wireless service provider:
DeleteDiscard the message. ReplyReply to the message. Create the message, and select Options >Send. Use numberChoose Save, Add to contact, Send message, or Call. SaveSave the message to a folder. Use web linkActivate web link (appears when the message contains a URL). Save addressSave e-mail address (appears when the message contains an e-mail address). ForwardForward the message to another phone number. RenameEdit the title of the message. Message folders Save messages To save drafts or received messages to a folder, do the following:
Open the message or create a new message, and select Options > Save or Save message > Sent items, Archive, Templates, or a folder you created 30 M e s s a g e s View saved messages 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages. 2. Select the folder containing the message you wish to view:
InboxStores read and unread messages. Sent itemsStores messages send from your phone automatically. ArchiveStores messages you have saved. TemplatesStores pictures and prewritten templates. My foldersProvides a place to organize your messages in custom folders. Select Options > Add folder or Open folder, Rename folder or Delete folder change a folder. 3. Once the folder opens, scroll to and select the message to view. Delete messages Delete a single message 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages. 2. Scroll to and select the folder containing the message you wish to delete. 3. Select Options > Delete > OK. Select Back to exit. If your message memory is full, Message overwriting is set to off, and you have more messages waiting at the network when No space for new messages is displayed in the standby mode. Delete messages in a folder 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Delete messages. 2. Scroll to the folder containing the messages you wish to delete, and Select one of the following options:
AllDeletes all messages in all folders All readDeletes any messages which have been read in all folders All unreadDeletes any messages which have not been read in all folders InboxDeletes all messages from the Inbox folder 31 M e s s a g e s Sent itemsDeletes all messages from the Sent items folder ArchiveDeletes all messages from the Archive folder User defined foldersDisplays all user defined folders that the user has added under My folders after the predefined folders. Only folders created in My folders can be deleted. The Inbox, Sent items, Archive, and Templates folders are protected. When a folder is deleted, all messages in the folder are also deleted 3. Select OK to empty the folder. Message settings Change sending options Note: Some or all of the following Sending options may be available as determined by your carrier. In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Message settings > Sending options and select the setting to change:
PrioritySets the priority of the note to Normal or Urgent.
Delivery noteReceives a note confirming delivery of the message. Select On or Off.
Send callback numberSends a callback number to the recipient. Select Off or enter your phone number. Change message settings In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Text messages > Message settings > Other settings, and one of the following options:
Message font sizeSelect Small font or Large font.
Message overwritingSelect Sent items only, Inbox only, S. items & inbox, or Off.
Save to Sent items as sendingSelect Always save, Always prompt, or Off. When the message memory is full, your phone cannot send or receive any new messages. However, you can set your phone to automatically overwrite selected messages in the Inbox or Sent items folders when new messages arrive. 32 M e s s a g e s Voice messages If you subscribe to voice mail, your wireless provider will furnish you with a voice mailbox number. Save this number to your phone to use voice mail. When you receive a voice message, your phone either beeps, displays a message, or both. If you receive more than one message, the number of messages received is displayed. Save voice mailbox number To see or save your voice mailbox number, in the standby mode, select Menu >
Messages > Voice messages > Voice mailbox number.
If your wireless provider has already saved your voice mailbox number to your phone, the number appears in the display. Select OK to leave the number unchanged.
If the number entry window is empty, enter the voice mailbox area code and number, and select OK Call and setup your voice mail 1. Once you have saved the voice mailbox number, press and hold 1. 2. When you connect to voice mail and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the services automated instructions to setup your voice mail. Listen to your voice messages To dial the voice mailbox number and listen to your voice messages, perform one of the following:
Dial the number using the keypad.
Press and hold 1.
If there is a notification message in the display, select Listen .
In the standby mode, select Menu > Messages > Voice messages > Listen to voice messages. Once you connect and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the automated instructions to listen to your voice messages. 33 M e s s a g e s Automate voice mail Special characters, called dialing codes, can be added to phone numbers. Dialing codes instruct the receiving system to pause, wait, bypass, or accept the numbers that follow them in the dialing string. See "Insert dialing codes," p. 34. Voice mail services vary by service provider. The following instructions are examples of common operations. Please check with your service provider for specific instructions for using your voice mail service. Set up voice mail with dialing codes 1. Write down your voice mailbox number. 2. Call and check your voice mail as you normally would. 3. Write down your interaction with the recorded prompts step-by-step. Keep in mind that each voice mail service may vary. However, it should be similar to the following:
Dial 2145551212, pause 5 seconds, press 1, pause 2 seconds, press 1234, press #. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Speed dials. 4. 5. Scroll to an (empty) 1-touch dialing slot and select Assign. 6. Enter your voice mailbox number, including the area code. 7. Enter any dialing codes as necessary using the information that you wrote down. If you pause for 5 seconds after connecting to voice mail, enter p twice after the voice mailbox number; for example, 2145551212pp. 8. Enter any remaining pauses or other information that allows you to listen to your messages, and select OK. 9. Enter a name (such as voice mail), and select OK. To dial and listen to your voice mail, in the standby mode, press and hold the assigned 1-touch dialing key. Insert dialing codes Press * repeatedly to cycle through the dialing codes. Once the desired code appears in the display, pause briefly. The code is inserted into the dialing string. The following dialing codes are available:
* Bypasses a set of instructions 34 M e s s a g e s
+ International prefix p Pauses for 2.5 seconds before sending the numbers that follow w Waits for you to press the call key before sending the numbers or codes that follow Minibrowser messages To retrieve minibrowser messages, in the standby mode, select Menu >
Messages > Minibrowser messages > With connect to launch the minibrowser, or Back to escape and return to Messages. 35 C o n t a c t s 7. Contacts The contacts list can hold up to 500 contacts with multiple numbers and text notes for each contact. The amount of numbers and text entries that you can save may vary, depending on length and the total number of entries in the contacts list. View the contacts list 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts and one of the following options:
SearchFind a name or select from a list. Add newAdd a contact to your contacts list. Edit nameEdit an existing name. DeleteDelete a name and its associated numbers. Add numberAdd a number to an existing name. SettingsChange the contacts list view, check the memory status of your phone. Speed dialsView or modify the list of speed dial numbers. Voice tagsAttach, listen to, or modify a contact voice tag. My phone no.View your own phone number. Caller groupsView and edit the properties for any of the caller groups:
Family, VIP, Friends, Business, or Other. 2. Scroll to and select an item to activate the feature or enter its submenu. Configure settings You can choose how the contacts appear in your contacts list and view the amount of memory used or available in your phone. For more information on used and available memory, see "Shared memory," p. 6. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Settings, and one of the following options:
Scrolling viewChoose how names and numbers stored in the contacts list are viewed. Select Name list or Name and no. 36 C o n t a c t s Memory statusView the amount of memory used in phone book. Search In the standby mode, select Contacts > Search; highlight the contact you wish to view, and select Details. Fast search for a name 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display your contacts list. 2. Press the key that corresponds to the first letter of the name for which you are performing a search. 3. Scroll up and down to highlight a contact, and select Details to view the details. Edit contacts list entries 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display the contents of your contacts list. 2. Scroll to the entry you would like to edit; select Details > Options and one of the following options:
Add voice tag or Voice tagAdd a new voice tag or Playback, Change, or Delete an existing voice tag. Edit numberEdit an existing contact number. Delete numberDelete a phone number from the contact. Use numberDisplay the phone number in the standby mode, ready to be called. ViewView the details of the contact. Change typeChange the number type to General, Mobile, Home, Work, or Fax or the detail type to E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note As primary no.Change the default number of the contact. Add numberAdd a number to the contact. Add detailAdd an address or note to the contact. Caller groupsAdd the contact to an existing caller group. Custom toneAdd a custom ringing tone to the contact. 37 C o n t a c t s Send bus. cardSend the contact as a business card to another phone. Send messageCreate and send a message to the contact. Speed dialAdd the contact to your speed dial list. Edit nameEdit the name of the contact. View nameView the name of the contact. DeleteDelete the entire contact entry from your contacts list. Edit phone number Highlight the phone number you would like to edit, and select Options. Add new contacts and numbers In the standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save. Save a name and number 1. 2. Select Options > Save. 3. Enter the contact name, and select OK. Save (only) a number In the standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save; select and hold Options. Save multiple numbers and text items The first number you save for any entry is automatically set as the default. The default setting can be changed later. To save different types of phone numbers and short text items per name to the phone memory, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display a list of entries. Scroll to the entry to which you wish to add a phone number or text item. 2. Select Details > Options > Add number to add a General, Mobile, Home, Work, or Fax number; or Add detail to add an E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note . 3. Enter the number or text for the type you have selected, and select OK. 38 C o n t a c t s 4. To change the type (E-mail, Web address, Street addr.), select Change type in the options list. To change which phone number is the default number for the contact entry:
1. In the standby mode, scroll down to the entry you wish to change, and select Details. 2. Scroll to the number you wish to set as default, select Options > As primary no. E-mail address entry Highlight the e-mail address entry you would like to send or update, and select Options and one of the following:
Send e-mailSend an e-mail. Edit detailEdit e-mail if number or text are highlighted. Delete detailDelete e-mail. ViewView the details of the e-mail contact. Change typeChange the e-mail type to E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note. Add detailAdd an E-mail, Web address, Street addr., or Note to the entry. Add numberAdd a number to the entry. Caller groupsAdd the e-mail to an existing caller group. Custom toneAdd a custom ring tone to the contact. Send bus. cardSend the contact a business card. Edit nameEdit the name of the contact. View nameView the name of the contact. DeleteDelete the entire e-mail entry from your contacts list. Edit Web address 1. Highlight the web address entry you would like to edit, and select Options. 2. Select Web address, Street addr., or Note > OK. Delete contacts list entries In the standby mode, select Contacts > Delete. 39 C o n t a c t s
To delete individual entries, select One by one, and scroll to the entry you wish to delete. Select Delete > OK to confirm.
To delete the entire contents of your contacts list, select Delete all > OK. Select OK to confirm or Back to return to Contacts. If OK, enter the security code, and select OK. See "Security settings," p. 56. Set up speed dials You can associate any entry in the contacts list with a key from 29; then dial those entries by pressing and holding the assigned key. See "Speed dialing," p. 47 to activate or deactivate speed dials. Assign a key to speed dials 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Speed dials. If 1-touch dialing is off, the phone displays a prompt asking if you would like to turn speed dials on. Select Yes to activate speed dials. 2. Scroll to an (empty) speed dial slot, and select Assign. 3. Enter the number (including the area code) and a name for the contact, or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list. 4. Select OK. Change speed dial numbers 1. 2. Scroll to the speed dial entry you wish to change, and select Options >
In the standby mode, select Contacts > Speed dials. Change. 3. Enter the new number; or search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. 4. Enter a name for the entry, and select OK. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Speed dials. Delete speed dial numbers 1. 2. Scroll to the 1-touch dialing location you wish to delete, and select Options. 3. Select Delete > OK. 40 C o n t a c t s Voice tags For more information on setting up voice tags and other voice features, see "Edit contacts list entries," p. 37. My phone number In the standby mode, select Contacts > My phone number to display the phone number of your device. Caller groups You can add contact list entries to any of five caller groups, and assign a unique ringing tone or graphic to that group. This enables you to identify callers from the group by their unique ringing tone or graphic. Set up a caller group 1. In the standby mode, scroll down to display a list of entries in your contacts list. 2. Scroll to a name you want to add to a caller group, and select Details. 3. Select Options > Caller groups. 4. Scroll to and select the caller group to which you would like to add the name. Options 1. In the standby mode, select Contacts > Caller groups > Family, VIP, Friends, Business, and Other. 2. Select from following caller group options:
Rename groupRename the group to your preference. Group ringing toneSet the ringing tone for the group. Group logoTurn the graphic for the caller group on or off or view the graphic. Group membersAdd or remove members from the caller group. 41 C o n t a c t s Send and receive contacts To send and receive an entry in your contacts list, use text messaging, if supported by your wireless provider. Send a business card To send a business card as a text message to a compatible phone or other handheld device, do the following:
1. Highlight the entry from the contacts list that you wish to send, and select Details > Options > Send bus. card > Via text msg., and do one of the following:
Select Primary no. or All details, if the entry has more than one number or detail.
Enter the number for your recipient.
Select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts list. 2. Select OK , to send the business card. 42 8. My Stuff M y S t u f f You can save pictures to folders in My Stuff and add new folders to the ones already there. Only devices that offer compatible multimedia message features can receive and display multimedia messages. Your device supports a digital rights management system to protect content that you have acquired. Content such as a ringing tone, can be protected and associated with certain usage rules, for example, the number of usage times or a certain usage period. Usage rules are defined in the content activation key that can be delivered with the content or delivered separately, depending on the service provider. You may be able to update the activation key. Always check the delivery terms of any content and activation key before acquiring them, as they may be subject to a fee. Copyright protection may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device has a limited amount of memory for storing files in My Stuff. This memory is not shared with other functions, such as contacts. If the device displays a message that the memory is full, delete some existing files before proceeding. Open My Stuff At the start screen, select Menu > My Stuff. The following submenus are displayed:
View foldersExplore the folders in the My Stuff menu. See View folders in the following section for more info. Add folderAdd a folder of your own. Delete folderDelete a folder you have created. Rename folderRename a folder you have created. View folders 1. At the start screen, select Menu > My Stuff > View folders > Images, Graphics, Tones, or a folder you have created > Open. 43 M y S t u f f 2. Scroll through the list of graphics or tones, select Options > Open, Delete, Move, Rename, Set as wallpap. (for graphics or image files), Details, or Sort to enter the folder submenus. 44 9. Settings S e t t i n g s Use this menu to change the time settings, call settings, phone settings, display settings, tone settings, enhancement settings, security settings, network, network services, and to restore the factory settings. Profiles Profiles define how your device reacts when you receive a call or message, how your keypad sounds when you press a key, and more. Ringing options, keypad tones, and other settings for each of the available profiles can be left at their default setting, or customized to suit your needs. The following profiles are available: Normal, Silent, Meeting, Outdoor, and Pager. Profiles are also available for enhancements such as headset and car kit. See
"Enhancements," p. 73. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Profiles, the profile of your choice, and Activate. Customize a profile You can customize any of the profiles a variety of ways. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Profiles. 2. Select the profile you wish to customize. 3. Select Customize and the option you want to customize: Incoming call alert, Ringing tone, Ringing volume, Vibrating alert, Message alert tone, Keypad tones, Warning tones, Alert for, or Profile name. You cannot rename the Normal profile. Set a timed profile Timed profiles can be used to prevent missed calls. For example, suppose you attend an event that requires your device be set to Silent before the event starts, but you forget to return it to Normal until long after the event. A timed profile can prevent missed calls by returning your device to the default profile at a time you specify. Timed profiles can be set up to 24 hours in advance. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu >Settings > Profiles. 45 S e t t i n g s 2. Select the profile you wish to activate and select Timed for timed expiration. 3. Enter the time in mm:ss for the profile to expire, and select OK. Call settings Location information sharing Location information sharing is a network service and must be supported by your wireless service provider. See "Network services," p. 5, for more information. Location info sharing allows the phone to share position information over the network. For calls to emergency numbers, this position information may be used by the emergency operator to determine the location of the phone. The functionality and accuracy of this feature is dependent on the network, satellite systems, and the agency that receives the information. It may not function in all areas or at all times. Location information is always shared with the network during emergency calls to the official emergency number programed into the phone, regardless of which setting is selected. After you place an emergency call the phone remains in emergency mode for five minutes. During this time, the location information is shared with the network. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Location info sharing > Emergency or On > OK > OK. EmergencyThis is the default profile. The phone location information is shared only during an emergency call to the official emergency number programed into your phone. The phone screen displays in the upper left hand corner when in the standby mode. OnThe phone location information is shared with the network whenever the phone is powered on and activated. The screen displays in the upper left-
hand corner when in the standby mode. Anykey answer Anykey answer allows you to answer an incoming call with a brief press of any key except the power, right selection, or end key. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Anykey answer >
On or Off. 46 S e t t i n g s Automatic redial Occasionally, your network may experience heavy traffic, which results in a fast busy signal when you dial. With automatic redial activated, your phone redials the number (number of times is specified by the network), and notifies you once the network is available. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Automatic redial >
On or Off. Speed dialing To activate or deactivate speed dialing. In the standby mode, select Menu >
Settings > Call settings > Speed dialing > On or Off. See "Set up speed dials," p. 40. Automatic update of service Your phone can receive updates to wireless services sent to your phone by your service provider. This option is a network service. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Auto-update of service > On or Off. Minibrowser confirmation To activate minibrowser confirmation, in the standby mode, select Menu >
Settings > Call settings > Minibrowser confirmation > None, On connection, On exit, or Both. Calling cards If you use a calling card for long distance calls, save the calling card number in your phone. The phone can store up to four calling cards. Contact your calling card company for more information. Save information 1. 2. Enter your security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 58. 3. Scroll to one of the four card memory locations, and select Options > Edit >
In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Calling card. Dialing sequence. 4. Select one of the following sequence types:
47 S e t t i n g s Access no. + phone no. + card no.Dial the 1-800 access number, phone number, then enter the card number (plus PIN if required). Access no. + card no. + phone no.Dial the 1-800 access number, card number (plus PIN if required), then enter the phone number. Prefix + phone no. + card no.Dial the prefix (numbers that must precede the phone number) and phone number, then enter the card number (plus PIN if required). 5. Enter the required information (access number or prefix and card number), and select OK to confirm your entries. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Calling card. 6. Select Card name > enter the card name > OK. Make calls After you have saved your calling card information in your phone, make a call with your calling card. 1. 2. Enter your security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 58. 3. Scroll to the calling card of your choice, select Options > Select > OK. 4. Press the end key to return to the standby mode and enter the phone number, including any prefix (such as 0 or 1) that your calling card may require when you make a calling card call. See your calling card for instructions. 5. Press and hold the call key for a few seconds until Card call is displayed. 6. When you hear the tone or system message, select OK. International prefix To store an international dialing prefix into your phone, enter + at the beginning of a phone number. Your phone automatically inserts the international dialing prefix that you stored. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > International prefix. 2. Enter the international dialing prefix (for example, 0011), and select OK. 3. In the standby mode, enter + (press * key twice) and the phone number to call
(for example, +3546789). 48 S e t t i n g s The phone calls the international dialing prefix you have stored in your phone and the phone number you have entered (for example, the phone calls 0011354789). Call summary Your phone can display the time spent on a call when you hang up. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call settings > Call summary > On or Off. Phone settings Phone language In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Phone language, and select the language: English or Franais. The phone language you choose affects the time and date formats of the clock, alarm clock, and calendar. Automatic keyguard To set the keypad of your phone to lock automatically after a preset time delay
(from 10 seconds to 60 minutes), do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Automatic keyguard > On or Off. If you select On, Set delay: is displayed. 2. 3. Enter the delay (in minutes and seconds), and select OK. Important: When keyguard is on, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into your phone. Enter the emergency number, and press the call key. The number is displayed only after you enter the last digit. Touch tones Touch tones sound when you press the keys on your phone keypad. You can use touch tones for many automated dial-up services such as banking and airlines, or for entering your voice mailbox number and password. 49 S e t t i n g s Touch tones are sent during an active call and can be sent manually from your phone keypad, or sent automatically by saving them in your phone. Set type 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Touch tones
> Manual touch tones. 2. Select one of the following options:
ContinuousSets tone sounds for as long as you press and hold a key FixedSends tones of the duration you specify in the Touch tone length option OffTurns off tones. No tones are sent when you press a key Set length To specify touch tone length when using the Fixed option, in the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Touch tones > Touch tone length >
Short (0.1 seconds) or Long (0.5 seconds). Welcome note You can write a welcome note that briefly appears on the display screen whenever you switch your phone on. Predictive text input is not available for entering welcome note text 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone settings > Welcome note. 2. Enter a note (up to 44 characters). Press * to display and select from the available special characters. 3. When you are finished, select Options > Save to save the welcome note or Delete to delete the previous text and create another welcome note. Help text Your phone displays brief descriptions for most menu items. These descriptions are called help text. The default setting for help text is On. To turn help text on or off, in the standby mode, select Menu >Settings > Phone settings > Help text activation > On or Off. 50 S e t t i n g s When Help text activation in turned On, select a feature or menu, pause for 10 to 15 seconds, and wait for the help text to display. Use the scroll keys to view the complete help text, if necessary. Display settings Wallpaper You can set your phone to display a background picture (wallpaper) in the standby mode. To activate or deactivate wallpaper, in the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Wallpaper > On or Off. To select the wallpaper you wish to display, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings >
Wallpaper > Select wallpap. 2. Highlight the Graphics folder, and select Open. 3. Browse the folder. 4. When you find an image, select Options > Set as wallpap. Color scheme You can change the color of some display components in your phone, such as indicators and signal bars. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Color schemes. 2. Select the color scheme of your choice. Banner Banner is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, choose whether the display shows the operator logo when the phone is in the idle state. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > My banner >
Default or Customize. Screen saver timeout If you have turned the screen saver on, the screen saver is activated when no function of the phone is used after a preset period of time. Press any key to 51 S e t t i n g s deactivate the screen saver. You can set your phone to display a screen saver after a preset time or after a custom time (up to 60 minutes) of your choosing. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Screen 1. saver time-out. 2. Scroll to and select the option of your choice. 3. To set a custom time (up to 60 minutes), select Other, enter the custom time, and select OK. Display brightness You can change the brightness of your phone display. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display settings > Display brightness. 2. Scroll up or down to adjust the brightness level to your preference. 3. Select OK to accept your settings. Time and date settings Time Show or hide the clock In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Show clock or Hide clock. Set the time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Set the time. 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you selected 12-hour format). Change the format In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Clock > Time format > 24-hour or 12-hour. 52 S e t t i n g s Date Show or hide the date In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date > Show date or Hide date. Set the date 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date > Set the date. 2. Enter the date, and select OK. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Date. Change the date format 1. 2. Scroll to Date format, and select a format. 3. Scroll to and select the Date separator. 4. Select a separator. Set the auto-update of date and time Auto-update is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can allow the digital network to set the clock, which is useful when you are out of your home area, or when you have traveled to another network or time zone. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time settings > Auto-update of date & time > On, Confirm first, or Off. If you use the Auto-update of date & time option while outside your digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually. Network time will replace the time and date when you re-enter your digital network. If your battery has been removed or has drained outside the digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually (once the battery is replaced or recharged, and if you are still outside of the digital network). Tone settings From this menu, you can adjust the ringing volume, keypad tones, and other tone settings for the active profile. See "Profiles," p. 45, for more information on profile settings. 53 S e t t i n g s Select Menu > Settings > Tone settings, and one of the following options:
Incoming call alertSelect how the device notifies you of an incoming call. Ringing toneSelect the ringing tone for incoming calls. Ringing volumeSet the volume of your ringing tone. Vibrating alertTurn the vibrating alert On or Off. Message alert toneSelect the tone for received messages. Keypad tonesSet the volume of your keypad tones (or turn them off). Warning tonesTurn warning and confirmation tones On or Off. Alert forDefine which caller groups the selected profile will accept or decline. Phone details From this menu, you can check details of your phone service. Select Menu >
Settings > Phone details, and one of the following options:
User detailsDisplay the mobile ID number (MIN) and own number (MDN). Version detailsDisplay the phone model, hardware version, and software version of the phone. System detailsDisplay the system ID, channel, preferred roaming list (PRL), mode, and frequency of the phone service. Enhancement settings The enhancement settings menu is shown only if the phone is or has been connected to a compatible enhancement. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > Headset, Handsfree, Loopset, TTY/TDD (carrier dependent), or Charger. Headset Scroll to and select an option of your choice, to enter the submenu and modify its settings. Default profileChoose the profile you wish to be automatically activated when a headset is connected. Automatic answerAnswered calls are automatically after one ring when a headset is connected. Select On or Off. 54 S e t t i n g s Handsfree Scroll to and select an option, to enter the submenu and modify its settings. Default profileSelect the profile you wish to automatically activate when your phone is connected to a car kit. See "Profiles," p. 45. Automatic answerSet so calls are answered automatically after one ring when a car kit is connected. Select On or Off. LightsChoose to keep the phone lights always on or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Select On or Automatic. Loopset The LPS-4 Loopset (for use with T-coil equipped hearing aids) is recommended for use with your phone. Scroll to and select the option of your choice, to enter the submenu and select Use loopset > Yes or No to modify the settings. TTY/TDD This feature is dependent on your carrier. In addition to the Nokia phone, you will need the following for TTY/TDD communication:
A TTY/TDD device that is cellular ready or cellular compatible.
A cable for connecting the TTY/TDD to your Nokia phone, usually supplied by the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device. Set up the TTY/TDD profile To connect your phone directly to the TTY/TDD device, set up the TTY/TDD profile. 1. Connect one end of the cable to the TTY/TDD device. 2. 3. Insert the other end of the cable into the headset jack. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > TTY/
TDD > Use TTY > Yes. TTY/TDD calls Important: Some manufacturers of TTY/TDD devices suggest that the phone be at least 18 inches from the TTY/TDD device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide or contact its manufacturer for detailed instructions and safety information.
Check with the manufacturer of the TTY/TDD device for a connecting cable that is compatible with the Nokia phone. 55 S e t t i n g s
TTY/TDD communications depend on network availability. Check with your service provider for availability and description of services. Make a call 1. In the standby mode, enter the number, and press the call key. 2. When the receiving party answers, begin typing your conversation on the TTY/
TDD. 3. Press the end key to end the call. Receive a call 1. Make sure the TTY/TDD device is connected to your phone. 2. Press the call key to answer the call, and type your responses on the TTY/TDD. 3. Press the end key to end the call. Charger In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancement settings > Charger, and one of the following options:
Default profileChoose the profile you wish to be automatically activated when your phone is connected to the charger. LightsChoose to keep the phone lights always on or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Select On or Automatic. Security settings Restrict calls Call restriction is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can restrict the calls your phone can make and receive. When calls are restricted, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your phone. Contact your service provider for the restriction password. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Call restrictions. 2. Enter the security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 58. 3. Select the type of calls you wish to restrict:
56 S e t t i n g s Restrict outgoing callsCalls cannot be made: Select, Add restriction, Edit, or Delete. Restrict incoming callsCalls cannot be received: Select or All calls. Activate or deactivate phone lock The phone lock feature protects your phone from unauthorized outgoing calls or unauthorized access to information stored in the phone. When phone lock is activated, Phone locked is displayed each time you turn your phone on. When the device is locked, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. Call not allowed is displayed if you attempt to place a call while phone is locked. To answer a call with phone lock on, select Answer or the call key. 1. 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 58. 3. Select one of the following options:
In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Phone lock.
OnTurns on the phone lock feature after power on.
OffImmediately turns off the phone lock feature. If you selected On, you must enter your lock code and the lock code must be accepted before the phone will function normally. Allow numbers when phone locked When phone lock is on, the only outgoing calls that can be made are to the emergency number programed into your phone (for example, 911) and the number stored in the Allowed number when phone locked location. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Allowed number when phone locked. 2. Enter the lock code and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 58. 3. Enter the phone number; or select Search to recall the number from the phone book, and select OK. 4. Press the call key to press the call. 57 S e t t i n g s Lock code When you change your lock code, make sure you store it in a safe place, away from your phone. Avoid entering access codes similar to emergency numbers such as 911 to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. The preset lock code is 1234. If you enter an incorrect lock code five times in a row, your phone will prompt you for the 5-digit, security code. If you enter the wrong lock code five times in succession, you will not be able to enter a code for 5 minutes, even if you power off the phone between incorrect entries 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Change lock code. 2. Enter the current (or default) lock code, and select OK. 3. Enter the new lock code (must be 4 characters in length), and select OK. 4. Reenter the new lock code for verification, and select OK. Voice privacy Voice privacy is a network service. See "Network services," p. 5. If your wireless service provider supports this feature, the voice privacy feature protects the privacy of your current phone conversation from other callers placing phone calls on your same network. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security settings > Voice privacy >
On or Off. Network services The following features are network services. See "Network services," p. 5. Store a feature code 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Network feature setting. 2. Enter the feature code from your service provider (for example, *633 Forward if busy), and select OK. 3. Select the type of forwarding that matches the feature code you entered (for example, Call forwarding). 58 S e t t i n g s The activated feature code is now stored in your phone, and you are returned to the Feature code: field. Continue entering other feature codes (for example, *633), or press the end key to return to standby mode. Once you enter a network feature code successfully, the feature becomes visible in the Network services menu. Call forwarding Call forwarding tells your network to redirect incoming calls to another number. Call forwarding is a network service and may not work the same in all networks, so contact your wireless provider for availability. Activate 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call forwarding and select one of the following options:
Forward all calls Forward if busy Forward if not answered Forward if out of reach Cancel all call forwarding 2. Select Activate. 3. Scroll to and select the destination to which your calls will be forwarded. 4. Enter the number to which your calls, data, or other information will be forwarded, and select OK. Call waiting If your wireless provider supports this feature, call waiting notifies you of an incoming call even while you are in a call. You can then accept, decline, or ignore the incoming call. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call waiting > Activate or Cancel. 2. During a call, select Answer or the call key to answer the waiting call. The first call is put on hold. 3. Press the end key to end the active call. 59 S e t t i n g s Send own caller ID when calling If your wireless service provider supports this feature, you can prevent your number from appearing on the receiving party caller ID. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Send own caller ID with next call > Yes or No. Network The menu options you see in your phone are based on your service providers network. The network determines which options actually appear in the phone menu. Check with your service provider for more information. The Network menu allows you to customize the way your phone chooses a network in which to operate while you are within or outside of your primary or home system. Your phone is set to search for the most cost-effective network. If your phone cannot find a preferred network, it selects a network automatically based on the option you choose in the Network menu. Roaming options To set your phone to roam or search for another network when you are not in your home area, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Roaming options. 2. Select one of the following options:
Home onlyMake and receive calls in your home area only. AutomaticPhone automatically searches for service in another digital network. If one is not found, the phone uses analog service. The roaming rate applies when you are not in the home service area. 3. Select OK, if necessary, to confirm the activation. Mode You can choose whether your phone uses digital or analog service. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Mode, and one of the following service options:
Digital pref.The phone works in digital mode but will also work in analog mode when digital mode is unavailable. Digital onlyThe phone only works in digital mode. 60 S e t t i n g s Analog onlyThe phone only works in analog mode. Restore factory settings This option resets some of the menu settings to their original values. It does not delete data that you have entered or downloaded, or affect entries in your contacts list. In the standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Restore factory settings. Enter the security code, and select OK. See "Lock code," p. 58. 61 T o o l s 10. Tools Your phone contains features to help organize your everyday life, including an alarm clock, calendar, calculator, countdown timer, and stopwatch. Alarm clock In the standby mode, select Menu > Tools > Alarm clock > Alarm time. Set an alarm The alarm clock is based on the phone clock. The alarm sounds an alert for any time you specify. 1. 2. Enter the time for the alarm (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you select 12-hour format). Alarm on is displayed briefly in the display, and standby mode. is displayed in the Change the time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time >
On. 2. Enter the time for the alarm (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Select am or pm (if you select 12-hour format). Alarm on is displayed briefly, and is displayed in the standby mode. Set the alarm tone You can set the tone to play when the alarm sounds. 1. 2. Highlight Standard, Ringing tone, or Open Gallery; and select a tone. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm tone. Alarm conditions When the alarm sounds, your phone beeps, vibrates (if vibrating alert is on for the currently active profile), and lights up the display. If you do not press a key, the alarm stops (snoozes) for 10 minutes, then sounds again. 62 T o o l s With the phone on, select Stop to shut the alarm off, or select Snooze. The alarm stops for 10 minutes and Snooze on is displayed. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop, the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Turn an alarm off In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Alarm clock > Alarm time > Off. Calendar The calendar tracks reminders, calls to make, meetings, and birthdays. It can even sound an alarm for any of these events. Monthly view provides an overview of the selected month and weeks. It also allows you to jump to a specific date. Any days or dates that appear in bold font contain calendar notes such as a meeting or reminder. Open In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. Move the cursor in some calendar views with the up and down scroll keys. Go to a date 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar > Options > Go to date. 2. Enter the date (for example, mm/dd/yyyy), and select OK. Note a specific date You can choose from five types of notes: Meeting, Call, Birthday, Memo, and Reminder. Your phone asks for further information depending on which note you choose. You also have the option to set an alarm for any note that you select. 1. Go to the date for which you want to set a reminder. See "Go to a date," p. 63, in the previous section if you need more information. 63 T o o l s 2. From the monthly view (with the go to date highlighted), select Options >
Make a note, and one of the following note types:
MeetingEnter a subject, a location, and a start and end time. You can then set an alarm. CallEnter a phone number, a name, and the time. You can then set an alarm. BirthdayEnter the persons name, and year of birth. You can then set an alarm. MemoEnter a subject and an end date and set an alarm. ReminderEnter the subject you wish to be reminded about and set an alarm. 3. Enter your note, and select Options > Save. View notes (day view) To view the created calendar notes, do the following:
1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. 2. Scroll to the date that has a note. (Days with notes are in bold font.) 3. Select Options > View day. 4. To view a highlighted note, select Options > View. Send a note 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calendar. 2. Scroll to the date containing the note. Any days containing notes are in bold font. 3. Select Options > View day. 4. Scroll to the note you wish to send, and select Options > Send note > Via 5. calendar or Via text msg. If you selected Via calendar, enter the number for the recipient or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. If you selected Via text msg., the note appears as a text message. 6. 7. Select Add number. 8. Enter the number for the recipient or select Search to retrieve a number from the contacts list, and select OK. 64 T o o l s 9. Select Options > Send. Receive notes When you receive a calendar note in calendar-to-calendar (vCal) format, Calendar note received is displayed. When you receive a calendar note as a text message, a message notification appears in the standby mode. You can then view, save, or discard the note and set an alarm for any date and time. Voice recorder This feature allows you to record, save, and listen to voice memos. The total available time is 30 seconds if no memos have been stored. The maximum length of a recording depends on how much memory remains available. Record speech or sound 1. At the start screen, select Menu > Tools > Voice memo > Record. 2. After the recorder start tone is heard, begin recording speech or sound. 3. When you are finished recording, select Stop. 4. Enter the title you wish to assign to the recording, and select OK. Your voice memo is saved to the Recordings list. Options After you have saved the recording to the Recordings list, highlight the recording, and choose one of the following options:
PlaybackListen to the recording using the earpiece. DeleteErase the recording. Edit titleRename the recording. Add alarmAdd an alarm to the recording. Calculator The calculator in your phone adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, calculates the square and the square root, changes the sign of the number entered, and converts currency values. Note: This calculator has a limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. 65 T o o l s 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calculator. 2. Enter the first number in the calculation. Press # for a decimal point if necessary. Press * to cycle through the add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/) characters. Pause briefly to select the displayed character. 3. Enter the second number in your calculation. 4. Select Options (equals is highlighted). To perform a square or square root calculation, select Options > Square or Square root. To change the sign, select Options > Change sign, or scroll to the key. Currency converter You can convert foreign currency to domestic directly from the standby mode or from the Calculator menu. 1. In the standby mode, enter a currency amount to convert or select Menu >
Organizer > Calculator, and enter a currency amount to convert. 2. Select Options > To home or To foreign. To homeconverts foreign currency to domestic currency To foreignconverts domestic currency to foreign currency 3. Enter the exchange rate (press # to insert a decimal), and select OK. You can edit the exchange rate at any time. When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Calculator > Options >
Exchange rate, and one of the following:
Foreign unit expressed in domestic unitsThe number of home units it takes to make one unit of foreign currency. Domestic unit expressed in foreign unitsThe number of foreign units it takes to make one unit of your home currency. 2. Enter the exchange rate, and select OK. 66 T o o l s Countdown timer You can enter a specified countdown time (up to 99 hours and 59 minutes). When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm. The countdown timer only works when the phone is on. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer. Set the countdown timer 1. 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm format), and select OK. 3. Enter a note for the timer, and select OK. The icon appears in the standby mode when the countdown timer is set. When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm, displays the timer note, and flashes its lights.
Press any key during the alarm to stop the timer.
After 30 seconds the timer alert expires automatically. Change the time After you have set the timer, you can change the time. 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer > Set timer:. 2. Enter the new time, and select OK. 3. Leave the note as it was or enter a new note, and select OK. Stop the timer After you have set the timer, you can stop the timer at any time. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Countdown timer > Stop timer. Stopwatch Your phone has a stopwatch that can be used to track time. The stopwatch displays time in hours, minutes, seconds and fractions of a second in hh:mm:ss:s format. Using the stopwatch or allowing it to run in the background when using other features increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. 67 T o o l s Measure time 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Stopwatch > Split timing or Lap timing > Start. The running time is displayed on the screen. 2. Select Split to note the lapsed time. The timer continues to run. The split time appears below the running time. If you split the time more than once, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. Scroll to see previous measured times. 3. Select Lap to note the lap time. The clock stops, then starts immediately from zero. The lap time appears below the running time. If you take more than one lap time, the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. You can scroll to see previous measured times. When you select Stop, the total time appears at the top. 4. Select Stop to end the timing. The total time is displayed on the screen. 5. Select Options > Save to save the split or lap time. 6. Enter a name for the measurement, and select OK. If you do not enter a name, the total time is used as the default title for the time. Operation note If you press the end key and return to standby mode, the clock continues to run in the background and To return to the stopwatch screens:
1. 2. To stop the clock, select Stop. In the standby mode, select Menu > Organizer > Stopwatch >Continue. appears in the upper left corner of the screen. Options The following options are available with the stopwatch: Continue, Show last time, Split timing, Lap timing, View times, and Delete times. 68 11. Games G a m e s Challenge yourself or a friend to one of the fun games in your phone. Some menus listed are network services. Contact Virgin Mobile for more information about networks. Play a game In the standby mode, select Menu > Games > Select game. 1. 2. Scroll to a game, and select Options > Open or the call key. 3. Select one of the following options (if supported by the particular game):
New gameLaunch a new game. High scoresView the high scores for this game (if previously played). InstructionsView instructions for playing the game. Scroll down to read more. Game settings 1. In the standby mode, select Menu > Games. 2. Scroll to and select one of the following game submenus:
Get newEnter a game option list. See "Game details," p. 69. MemoryCheck the available memory for games and game-related applications. SettingsTurn Game sounds, Game lights, and Shakes on or off. Game details To display the name, version, and size of a selected game, select Options >
Details. 69 V X L 12. VXL Your device has access to VXL, which includes selected services on the mobile Internet. You can access popular features, exclusive music, entertainment, information services, and much more. VXL is updated frequently. Check the Virgin Mobile web site at virgin.com/mobile, for availability and pricing. Sign on to VXL At the start screen, select Menu > Extra Virgin. After a brief pause, your device attempts to connect to VXL. If you receive an error message, your device may not be set up for browsing. Contact your wireless provider to make sure that your device is configured properly. Your device cannot receive incoming calls when in VXL. Incoming calls are automatically forwarded to voice mail. Navigate VXL Since your device screen is much smaller than a computer screen, the content is displayed differently from what you may be accustomed to seeing. This section contains guidelines for using device keys to navigate the site. Device keys
To browse the site, scroll up or down.
Select a highlighted item.
To enter letters and numbers, press a key from 09.
To enter special characters, press *. Make an emergency call while online You can end your data connection, then make an emergency call. 1. To close your connection, press End. 2. Press End as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 70 3. Enter the emergency number for your present location (for example, 911). V X L Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press Call. Disconnect To close your VXL connection, press and hold End. 71 P C C o n n e c t i v i t y 13. PC Connectivity With the PC Suite you can, for example, create and send text and picture messages, and synchronize contacts and calendar between your phone and a compatible PC. Some of the features available in PC Suite are carrier dependent. Check www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia Web site for the latest version of this guide, additional information, downloads, and services related to your Nokia product. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Nokia PC Suite Nokia PC Suite software is available for the Nokia 2125i phone. Nokia PC Suite is a collection of powerful tools that you can use to manage your device features and data. Each component is a separate program that includes online helps. Nokia PC Suite software, installation instructions, and other documentation, which are provided free of charge and can be downloaded from the software downloads of the Nokia Web site: www.nokiausa.com/pcsuite. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your phone as a modem You can use your Nokia phone as a modem while connected to a compatible PC, giving you access to the Internet (for sending and receiving e-mail and Web browsing). To use your phone as a modem, install the modem software manually on your PC. The downloadable modem software is on the Nokia website at www.nokiausa.com/support/software/. Modem data service is a network-dependent feature. For availability and subscription to data services, contact your network operator or service provider. 72 14. Enhancements E n h a n c e m e n t s Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-7 or ACP-12. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. A few practical rules about accessories and enhancements.
Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children.
When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Check regularly that enhancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly.
Installation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualified personnel only. Power
Standard 1070 mAh Li-Ion Battery (BL-6C)
Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7)
Travel Charger (ACP-12)
Mobile Charger (LCH-12)
Retractable Charger (AC-1) Audio
Headset (HS-5)
Boom Headset (HDB-4)
Loopset (LPS-4)
FM Radio Headset (HS-2R) 73 E n h a n c e m e n t s
Retractable Headset (HS-10) Data
Data Cable (DKU-5)
CA-43 Cable
Desk Stand with Sync (DCV-15) Car
Full Car Kit (CK-6)
Car Installation Kit (CARK-126)
Mobile Holder (MBC-17)
Mobile Lighter Charger (LCH-12)
Headrest Handsfree (BHF-1) 74 15. Battery information B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. To prolong battery life of NiMh batteries, discharge the battery from time to time by leaving your device switched on until it turns itself off. Do not attempt to discharge the battery by any other means. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15C and 25C (59F and 77F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. 75 B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose batteries as household waste. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the packaging and inspect the hologram label using the following steps:
Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it and take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1.When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2.When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. 76 B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n 3.Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for example 12345678919876543210. Turn the battery so that the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokia.com/
batterycheck. What if your battery is not authentic?
If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery. 77 C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage.
Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it.
Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged.
Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics.
Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards.
Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide.
Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics.
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device.
Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation.
Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses).
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
Use chargers indoors.
Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes, before sending your device to a service facility. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. 78 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n Additional safety information Operating environment Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 2.2 cm (7/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with a hearing aid should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cm
(6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should:
79 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n
Always keep the device more than 15.3 cm (6 in) from the pacemaker when the device is switched on.
Do not carry the device in a breast pocket.
Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move the device away. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel 80 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call:
1. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. phone for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification Information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards and guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of the public, regardless of age and health and to account for any variations in measurements. 81 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit set by ICNIRP is 2.2 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be well below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value when tested according to international testing procedures for use at the ear is 0.72 W/kg. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokiausa.com. USA and Canada: The SAR limit of USA (FCC) and Canada (IC) is 1.6 W/kg averaged over 1 gram of tissue. This device model has also been tested against this SAR limit. The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for use at the ear is 1.21 W/Kg and when properly worn on the body is 1.17 W/kg. Information about this device can be found on the FCC's website at http://
www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid by searching the equipment authorization system using FCC ID: QMNRH-71. Technical information DimensionsWidth 49.9 mm (1.96 inches); length 108.3 mm (4.26 inches);
depth 23.2 mm (0.91 inches) Weight3.84 oz (108.8 g) with BL-6C Li-Ion Battery Volume5.95 cu in (97.5 cu cm) Frequency range (Tx)PCS 1851.251908.75 MHz;
Cellular 824.70848.37 MHz Frequency range (Rx)PCS 1931.251988.75 MHz;
Cellular 869.70893.37 MHz GPS Frequency1575.42 MHz Battery information This section provides information about battery charging times with the Travel Charger (ACP-12) and the Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7), talk-times, and standby times. Be aware that the information in this section is subject to change. For more information, contact your service provider. 82 A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n Charging times The following charging times are approximate with the BL-6C 1070 mAh Li-Ion battery:
Travel Charger (ACP-12): up to 1 hour 45 minutes Standard Travel Charger (ACP-7): up to 3 hours 45 minutes Talk and standby times Operation times are estimates only and depend on signal strength, phone use, network conditions, features used, battery age and condition (including charging habits), temperatures to which the battery is exposed, and many other factors. Talk time: up to 3.7 hours cellular and 4.1 hours PCS Standby time: up to 12 days Patent information Manufactured or sold under one or more of the following US patents:
D405445 5491718 5758278 5887250 6025802 6088342 6377813 D406583 5596571 5790957 5887252 6029065 6148209 6414640 D414189 5642377 5793744 5889770 6047071 6154455 6434186 D405784 5699482 5796757 5929813 6055264 6167038 6459689 D423515 5701392 5802465 5990740 6072787 6205325 6463031 4969192 5708656 5821891 5991627 6076181 6253075 6466173 5440597 5737323 5854978 6005889 6078570 6292474 6480700 5444816 5754976 5859843 6009129 6084471 6332083 6480155 6486835 6496150 6570909 6580771 6587685 Others 4558302 4901307 5056109 5101501 5109390 5265119 RE32580 83 IndexNumerics1-touch dialing 27alarm clock 76antenna 13anykey answer 50applications 85automate voicemail 39automatic redial 51automatic update of service 51auto-update 57Bback coverremoving 14replacing 14, 17banner 58batteries and chargers 90batterycharging 14charging times 96removing 14replacing 14, 17talk and standby times 96battery information 96business cards 31Ccalculator 80calendar 77call duration 45call forwarding 66call log 43caller groups 26calling cards 52callsanswering 19in-call options 20making 18care and maintenance 91certification information (SAR) 94chargerconnecting 14information 90times 96color schemes 58contacts list 25add 25delete 29edit 28send 31view 30countdown timer 81currency converter 81customer care 7Ddata/fax calls 53dialing codes 39display language 54display settings 58downloadapplications 85Eemergency calls 94while using wireless Internet 75with keypad locked 55enhancement settings 59handsfree 59headset 59, 60music stand 61TTY/TDD 60enhancements 88ESN 7exchange rate 81FFCC information 94feature codes 65Ggallery 68games 69Hhandsfree 59headset 15, 59, 60help 7help text 12, 56Iindicators and icons 9KKeyguard 20automatic 54Llanguages 54loudspeaker 19Mmessage folders 40messagesdelete 41minibrowser messages 40picture messages 36text messages 32voice messages 38minibrowser 74minibrowser messages 40music stand 61NNetwork Services 6organizer 76Ppatent information 97phone settings 54picture messages 36predictive text 23profiles 48Qquick keys 9Rrestore factory settings 67restrict calls 61Ssafety 4important safety information 92screen saver 58scrolling 12security code 62, 63, 64security settings 61send own caller ID 67setdate 57time 56settings 50shared memory 7shortcuts 12start screen 9stopwatch 82Ttalk and standby times 96technical information 96text entry 22text messages 32time and date settings 56timed profiles 48tone settings 59, 64touch tones 55TTY/TDD 60turn phone off 15turn phone on 15Vviewcall duration 45call times 44data/ call duration 46dialed numbers 44minibrowser duration 46missed calls 43own phone number 67picture messages 37received calls 44saved messages 41voice 70voice commands 71voice dialing 70voice messages 38voice privacy 64voice recorder 72voicemail 38volumeadjusting 19using the loudspeaker 19Wwallpaper 58warranty 111welcome note 55wireless Internet 74make an emergency call 75receive a call while online 75sign on 74XXpress-on covers 16 84
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2005-06-11 | 1851.25 ~ 1908.75 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2005-06-11
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Microsoft Corporation
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0021495809
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
1 Microsoft Way
|
||||
| 1 |
Redmond, Washington 98052
|
|||||
| 1 |
United States
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@atcb.com
|
||||
| 1 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
QMN
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
RH-71
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
H******** S******
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Director, EMC, SI and RF Compliance
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
425-7********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
425-7********
|
||||
| 1 |
h******@microsoft.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Nokia Inc.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M****** W********
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
12278 Scripps Summit Drive
|
||||
| 1 |
San Diego, California 92131
|
|||||
| 1 |
United States
|
|||||
| 1 |
s******@nokia.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Tri-mode Dual Band Analog/PCS Phone | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | Power Output is ERP for Part 22 and EIRP for Part 24. Body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and which provide at least 2.2 cm separation between the device and the users body. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 22 AMPS Head: 1.21 W/kg; Body-worn 1.17 W/kg; Part 22 CDMA Head: 1.21W/kg; Body-worn 1.09 W/kg: PCS Band Head: 1.1 W/kg; Body-worn 0.65 W/kg | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 24E | BC | 1851.25 | 1908.75 | 0.403 | 150 Hz | 1M25F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 22H | BC | 824.04 | 848.97 | 0.41 | 2.5 ppm | 40K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 3 | 22H | BC | 824.04 | 848.97 | 0.41 | 2.5 Hz | 40K0F8W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 4 | 22H | BC | 824.7 | 848.31 | 0.41 | 300 Hz | 1M25F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC